FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1022-H 802.11ag/Draft 802.11n WLAN PCI-E Mini Card

434155-001.fm Page 1 Monday, June 26, 2006 11:25 AM HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer with Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone. Your new computer, when used with Built-in 3G broadband service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or just about anywhere.*

Before you can use Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone (service purchased separately), you must activate service and install the preloaded software. You will be prompted to run the HP Broadband Wireless setup utility when you start the computer. To activate your Vodafone service and install the preloaded software, follow the instructions in the setup utility. To learn more about the benefits of your HP Broadband Wireless computer and Built-in 3G broadband, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless.

*Subject to coverage availability. Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. VODAFONE and the Vodafone logos and Vodafone Mobile Connect are trade marks of the Vodafone Group. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trade marks of their respective owners. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2006 PRINTER: Replace this box with Printed- In (PI) Statement(s) as per spec. NOTE: This box is simply a placeholder. PI Statement(s) do not have to fit inside the box but should be placed in this area. 434155-001

435748-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435748-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435748-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435748-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435748-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435748-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435748-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B7 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435748-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, click View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 38 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in Standby or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Standby or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel

> Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. 44 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

My HP Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband (wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection There are 3 basic types of Internet connection:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously back up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backup up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started AppB.fm Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:57 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the My Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up individual files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup and Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup and Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Getting Started B7 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recover important files or the entire system, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter identifying 12 using 15 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 slot, SIM 27 modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Getting Started Index3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 Standby 43 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Standby problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435751-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 country-specific modem cable adapter 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 ENWW mute 4 num lock 4, 6 power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 modem cable 16 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 memory module 14 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 ENWW Index 19

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435813-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 mute 4 num lock 4, 6 ENWW power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slot memory module 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 ENWW Index 19

435816-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435816-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435816-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435816-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435816-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435816-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435816-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B8 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435816-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup & Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows online Help for more information. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Getting Started 37 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 38 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 9 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. Getting Started 39 435816-001.book Page 10 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel >

System and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 44 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with this procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or the cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband

(wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection You can choose one or more of the following methods to connect to the Internet:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create a set of recovery discs

(Recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs,:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up user created files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup &

Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup &

Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Getting Started B7 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 12 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 Sleep 43 slot, SIM 27 Getting Started Index3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Sleep problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Fifth Edition: June 2007 First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-005 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ............................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................... 2 Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ........................................................................................................................ 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules ......................... 3 Brazilian notice ........................................................................................................................ 4 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 4 Canadian notices ..................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ......................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ............................................................................................................ 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................ 6 France ...................................................................................................... 6 Italy .......................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................... 6 Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules ............................................................ 7 Ergonomics notice ..................................................................................................... 7 Germany .................................................................................................. 7 Indian notice ........................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ...................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 8 Bluetooth devices .................................................................................................... 10 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ................................................................ 10 Korean notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Singaporean wireless notice .................................................................................................... 11 Taiwan notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................ 11 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 11 ENERGY STAR compliance ..................................................................................................... 12 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................... 12 Modem notices ...................................................................................................................... 13 Telecommunications device approvals ....................................................................... 13 U.S. modem statements ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem declarations ......................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements .................................................................................... 21 Japanese modem statements ..................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements .............................................................................. 22 Voice support .......................................................................................... 22 Power cord notice .................................................................................................................. 23 Japanese power cord notice ..................................................................................... 23 Macrovision Corporation notice ............................................................................................... 23 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice ........................................................................................... 24 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 24 Headset and earphone volume level notice ............................................................................... 24 Power cord notices ................................................................................................................. 25 Travel notice .......................................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner .................................. 25 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal ..................................................................................................................... 26 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ................................................................................ 26 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 26 Chinese material content declarations ....................................................................................... 27 Japanese material content declaration ...................................................................................... 29 United States mercury disposal ................................................................................................ 29 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ...................................................................... 29 Index ................................................................................................................................. 30 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device may not cause harmful interference. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-

GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Italy L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz

(Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Broadband Wireless Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The SAR information for your computer, including the recommended minimum distance from the body, is available on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennae are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/

kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG has the certification mark below:

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENWW Korean notice 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENERGY STAR compliance Computers bearing the ENERGY STAR logo are compliant with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR specifications for Notebook computers. The EPA ENERGY STAR logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING!

always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/

laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. ENWW Power cord notice 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING!

To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Battery notices To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery; short WARNING!

the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notices WARNING!

To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Travel notice WARNING!

power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION:

distribution system. To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable ENWW Power cord notices 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalen t Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel X X X X X X X X X X X Media (CD/DVD/floppy) O Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking decice Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

USB flash memory driveUSB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation "Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment."

NOTE:

conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. ENWW Japanese material content declaration 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 11 B battery disposal notice 26 battery notice 11, 24 Brazilian notice 4 C cable grounding notice 25 Canadian modem statement 21 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 27 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 26 equipment 26 mercury 29 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 26 ENERGY STAR compliance 12 environmental notices 26 equipment disposal notice 26 ergonomics notice 7 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 New Zealand 22 U.S. 14 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 7 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 29 Japanese modem statement 21 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 23 K Korean notice 11 L laser safety notice 12 M Macrovision Corporation notice 23 mercury disposal notice 29 modem notices 13 modem statements Canadian 21 Japanese 21 N New Zealand modem statement 22 notices airline travel 11 battery 11, 24, 26 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 26 equipment disposal 26 ergonomics 7 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 24 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 23 Korean 11 laser safety 12 Macrovision Corporation 23 mercury disposal 29 modem 13 perchlorate material 29 power cords 23, 25 Singaporean 11 Taiwan 11 travel 25 P power cord notice 23, 25 S Singaporean wireless notice 11 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 11 travel notice 25 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 14 V voice support 22 W wireless LAN devices 3 ENWW Index 31 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Regulatory Statements to be included in the Users Guide for Sputnik USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

HP Notebook PC Getting Started Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-

Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: July 2007 Document Part Number: 443826-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. iii iv Product notice Table of contents 1 First-time setup Identifying hardware for setup ................................................................. 1 Setting up the computer .......................................................................... 2 Step 1: Insert the battery ......................................................... 3 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power ....................... 4 Step 3: Open the computer ..................................................... 5 Step 4: Turn on the computer .................................................. 6 Step 5: Set up the software ..................................................... 6 Step 6: Create recovery discs (recommended) ........................... 7 2 Quick tour Identifying the hardware ......................................................................... 9 Top components .................................................................... 9 Lights ................................................................... 9 Buttons, switches, and pointing devices ................. 10 Display components ............................................ 11 Keys .................................................................. 12 Front components ................................................................ 13 Rear components ................................................................. 14 Right-side components .......................................................... 15 Left-side components ............................................................ 16 Bottom components .............................................................. 17 Wireless antennae ............................................................... 18 3 Finding information Finding Help and Support ..................................................................... 19 Finding the user guides ......................................................................... 19 Identifying installed software and hardware ............................................ 20 4 Next steps Protecting the computer ......................................................................... 21 Protecting the computer from viruses ...................................... 21 Protecting your system files ................................................... 21 Protecting your privacy ......................................................... 21 Protecting the computer from power surges ............................. 22 Using the computer safely ..................................................... 22 Connecting to a computer network ......................................................... 24 Installing additional hardware and software ............................................ 25 Installing hardware .............................................................. 25 Locating and installing software ............................................. 25 Updating the software installed on the computer ...................................... 26 Turning off the computer ....................................................................... 26 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources ..................................................................... 27 v Quick troubleshooting ........................................................................... 28 The computer is unable to start up ......................................... 28 The computer screen is blank ................................................ 29 Software is functioning abnormally ........................................ 29 The computer is turned on but not responding ......................... 30 The computer is unusually warm ............................................ 31 An external device is not working .......................................... 31 The wireless network connection is not working ....................... 32 Contacting technical support ................................................................. 33 Appendix A Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs ........................................................................ 35 Backing up your information .................................................................. 36 When to back up ................................................................ 36 Backup suggestions ............................................................. 37 Backing up specific files or folders ......................................... 38 Backing up the entire hard drive ............................................ 38 Creating recovery points ...................................................... 39 Scheduling backups ............................................................. 39 Performing a recovery ........................................................................... 40 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs ......................... 40 Performing a recovery from the hard drive .............................. 40 Initiating a recovery in Windows .......................... 40 Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition ............................................................. 41 Appendix B Operating environment and input power Operating environment ......................................................................... 43 Input power ......................................................................................... 44 Appendix C Routine care Cleaning the display ............................................................................ 45 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................... 45 Traveling and shipping ......................................................................... 45 Index .................................................................................................... 47 vi First-time setup 1 Identifying hardware for setup To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. NOTE: Components included with the computer may vary by region or country and by model. Component

(1)

(2) Power cord AC adapter Component

(3)

(4) Primary battery Modem cable (select models only) NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. NOTE: A modem cable is required only for dial-up networking. Identifying hardware for setup 1 Setting up the computer CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. 2. Connecting the computer to external power Inserting the battery into the computer The battery begins to charge. NOTE:

3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) NOTE: Refer to Appendix A, "Backup and recovery," for instructions. 2 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. To insert the battery:

1. 2. Align the tabs (1) on the battery with the notches on the battery bay. 3. Press the battery (2) into the battery bay until the battery clicks into place. Setting up the computer 3 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power NOTE: Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external power:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. NOTE: A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but the battery charge display will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. 4 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 3: Open the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch (1) to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display (2). Setting up the computer 5 Step 4: Turn on the computer To turn on the computer:

Slide the power switch to the right (1). The power light (2) turns on. Step 5: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. If you are prompted to select an operating system language, CAUTION:

choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software NOTE:

setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. 6 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 6: Create recovery discs (recommended) You can use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create a set of recovery discs containing your full factory image. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix A, Backup and Recovery, for detailed instructions. Setting up the computer 7 8 Chapter 1 First-time setup 2 Quick tour Identifying the hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Top components Lights Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Power light Battery light Drive light Caps lock light Component

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Num lock light Identifying the hardware 9 Buttons, switches, and pointing devices Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Pointing stick Presentation button Volume mute button

(5)

(6)

(7) Volume scroll zone Right pointing stick button Left pointing stick button 10 Chapter 2 Quick tour Display components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Integrated camera (select models only) Camera light (select models only) Camera mode switch (select models only) Keyboard light Keyboard light button

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) HP Fingerprint Sensor (fingerprint reader) Internal microphones (2) Convertible hinge Ambient light sensor Identifying the hardware 11 Keys Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3) esc key fn key Windows logo key

(4)

(5)

(6) Windows applications key Embedded numeric keypad keys Function keys 12 Chapter 2 Quick tour Front components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Camera light (select models only) Camera mode switch Keyboard light button External WWAN antenna button

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) External WWAN antenna Power switch Display release latch Bluetooth compartment Identifying the hardware 13 Rear components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Windows security button*

RJ-11 (modem) jack RJ-45 (network) jack

(4)

(5) External monitor port Power connector

*This button is used to enter the ctrl+alt+delete command. To protect your work and the system, the ctrl

+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the ctrl, alt, and del keys on the on-screen keyboard. 14 Chapter 2 Quick tour Right-side components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Fingerprint reader 1394 port Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack

(5)

(6)

(7) Media Card Reader USB port Security cable slot Identifying the hardware 15 Left-side components NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Pen slot Vent ExpressCard slot (select models only) Wireless light

(5)

(6)

(7) Wireless switch Info button Powered USB port Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Pen slot Vent Smart card reader (select models only) Wireless light

(5)

(6)

(7) Wireless switch Info button Powered USB port 16 Chapter 2 Quick tour Bottom components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Battery bay Speaker SIM slot Vents (2)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Docking connector Charge level indicator Battery release latch Accessory battery connector Hard drive compartment

(10) Accessory battery connector door Identifying the hardware 17 Wireless antennae On select computer models, wireless antennae send and receive signals from one or more wireless devices. Component Component

(1)

(2) WWAN antenna*

WLAN antennae (2)*

(3) External WWAN antenna

*Antennae (1) and (2) are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the NOTE:

antennae free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. 18 Chapter 2 Quick tour Finding information 3 Finding Help and Support NOTE: Help and Support is preinstalled on the computer. Access to Help and Support does not require an Internet connection. You can access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. In addition to providing information about the Windows operating system, Help and Support includes these topics:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications How to help safeguard the computer How to get the best performance from the battery How to set up a wireless network Links to community forums of IT experts Finding the user guides User guides and regulatory and safety information are provided on the computer and are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. NOTE: User guides for select models may also be provided on a User Guides disc. Finding Help and Support 19 Identifying installed software and hardware To see a list of the software that is preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

Select Start > All Programs. NOTE: Double-click the name of a program if you want to open it. For details about using software included with the computer, refer NOTE:

to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. You can also use Device Manager to add hardware or modify device configurations. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of the computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows Help for more information. In the left pane, click Device Manager. 20 Chapter 3 Finding information 4 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how to protect the computer from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. To access Norton Internet Security or get more information about it, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Protecting your system files The operating system and the backup and recovery software provide several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. For additional information, refer to Appendix A, Backup and recovery. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. Protecting the computer 21 To optimize the computers privacy protection features, follow these guidelines:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are commonly available from computer or electronics retailers in many regions. Using the computer safely To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your WARNING!

equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. 22 Chapter 4 Next steps To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort WARNING!

Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. To access this document, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or refer to the User Guides disc included with some models. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of WARNING!

overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or WARNING!

battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access the notices, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or refer to the User Guides disc included with some models. Protecting the computer 23 Connecting to a computer network Bluetooth Local area network (LAN) The computer has the following networking capabilities:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. NOTE:

wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with the computer. You can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a 24 Chapter 4 Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Installing hardware To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software Software on the computer is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled software. To see a list of ready-to-use programs or to start a program, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs. A list of programs is displayed. 2. Click the name of a program to start the program. Preloaded software. This software cannot be used until it is installed. To locate and install a preloaded program or driver, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Software Setup. A list of programs and drivers is displayed. 2. Click the program or driver you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Software on disc. To install software from a disc, follow these steps:

1. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen Insert the disc into your optical drive. instructions. NOTE: Restart the computer if you are prompted to do so. For details about using the software provided with the computer, NOTE:

refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, in the software Help, or on the manufacturers Web site. Installing additional hardware and software 25 Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software installed on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access links for updating installed software, refer to Help and Support. Turning off the computer Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these steps, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 26 Chapter 4 Next steps 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Access Web site links and additional information about the computer Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools, like Help and Support, can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. For further assistance, connect to the Internet and contact technical support by selecting Start > Help and Support > Contact support. Troubleshooting resources 27 Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you slide the power switch, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating. NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with this computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided, until startup occurs:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 28 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank but you have not turned off the computer, one or more of these settings may be the cause:

The computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly slide the power switch to the right. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but is not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. The computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external displays, and simultaneous display on all devices. Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, follow these suggestions:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 4. Quick troubleshooting 29 The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these steps, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 30 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting The computer is unusually warm To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING!

overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). NOTE:

components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during operation. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal An external device is not working If an external device does not function as expected, confirm these settings:

The device is turned on as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. All device connections are secure. The device is receiving electrical power. The device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with the operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. The correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, refer to Help and Support. Quick troubleshooting 31 The wireless network connection is not working If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

NOTE:

administrator. If you are connecting to a corporate network, contact the IT Be sure that the wireless device is turned on and the wireless light on the computer is blue. If the light is amber, press the wireless switch to turn on the wireless device. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. NOTE:

information and the Web site links in Help and Support. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the 32 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to start a chat session with a support specialist or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). Contacting technical support 33 34 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting A Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R discs (purchased separately). NOTE: Read-write discs, such as CD-RW, DVD+RW, and DVD-RW discs, are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of the recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. Creating recovery discs 35 Backing up your information NOTE: You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis NOTE: Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software 36 Appendix A Backup and recovery Backup suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

a. b. Display the screen. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. NOTE: Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. NOTE: Drivers, utilities, and programs installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Backing up your information 37 Backing up specific files or folders This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). NOTE:

the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Back up user created files and folders, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. NOTE: A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. NOTE:

amount of data being stored. To back up your entire hard drive:

1. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. 38 Appendix A Backup and recovery Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. NOTE:

created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make copies of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally NOTE: Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup &

Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Backing up your information 39 Performing a recovery NOTE: You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup

& Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Back up all personal files. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. 4. 5. 40 Appendix A Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. Back up all personal files. Performing a recovery 41 42 Appendix A Backup and recovery B Operating environment and input power Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating

-20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 32F to 95F 41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Operating environment 43 Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 19 V dc @ 4.7 A - 90 W 4.74 A 44 Appendix B Operating environment and input power C Routine care Cleaning the display To prevent permanent damage to the computer, never spray water, cleaning CAUTION:

fluids, or chemicals on the display. To remove smudges and lint, frequently clean the display with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. If the screen requires additional cleaning, use premoistened antistatic wipes or an antistatic screen cleaner. Cleaning the keyboard To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not WARNING!

use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Traveling and shipping The computer is built to go with you for work and play. For best results, follow the traveling and shipping tips described here. To prepare the computer for traveling and shipping, follow these steps:

1. 2. Back up your information. Remove all optical discs and all external media cards, such as digital cards and ExpressCards. CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove discs from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay, and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. 3. 4. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage, and do not check it in with Shut down the computer. the rest of your bags. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Cleaning the display 45 If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, place it in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device or a cell phone device installed, such as an 802.11b/g, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), or a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) device, note that the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Contact technical support to discuss power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING!

equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the 46 Appendix C Routine care Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 15 A AC adapter connecting 4 identifying 1 accessory battery connector, identifying 17 altitude specifications 43 ambient light sensor, identifying 11 antennae external WWAN 13, 18 WLAN 18 WWAN 18 antivirus software 21 applications key, Windows 12 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 15 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 15 B backup files and folders 38 hard drive 38 modifications made to system 39 scheduling 39 battery charging 4 identifying 1 inserting 3 battery bay, identifying 17 battery light behavior 4 identifying 9 battery release latch, identifying 17 bay, battery 17 blank screen, troubleshooting 29 Bluetooth 24 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 13 buttons external WWAN antenna 13 info 16 keyboard light 11, 13 pointing stick 10 presentation 10 volume mute 10 Windows security 14 C cables and cords modem 1 power 1, 4, 46 camera light, identifying 11, 13 camera mode switch, identifying 11, 13 camera, identifying 11 caps lock light, identifying 9 charge level indicator, identifying 17 cleaning the display 45 cleaning the keyboard 45 compartments hard drive 17 memory module 17 wireless devices 17 components bottom 17 display 11 front 13 left-side 16 rear 14 right-side 15 top 9 wireless antennae 18 computer turning off 26 turning on 6, 28 computer viruses 21 connecting the computer to external power 4 connecting to a computer network 24 connectors accessory battery 17 docking 17 power 4, 14 convertible hinge, identifying 11 cord, power 46 creating recovery points 39 customer support Help and Support 19 user guides 19 D devices, external, troubleshooting 31 display cleaning 45 switching image 29 display release latch, identifying 13 Index 47 display switch, identifying 10 docking connector, identifying 17 documentation 19 drive light, identifying 9 E electric shock 22 emergency shutdown procedures 26, 30 entire hard drive backup 38 environmental specifications 43 esc key, identifying 12 ExpressCard slot, identifying 16 external devices, troubleshooting 31 external monitor port, identifying 14 external WWAN antenna button, identifying 13 external WWAN antenna, identifying 13, 18 F fingerprint reader, identifying 11, 15 firewalls 22 fn key, identifying 12 function keys, identifying 12 H hard drive backup 38 hard drive compartment, identifying 17 hard drive recovery 40 hardware identifying 20 installing 25 needed for setup 1 headphone (audio-out) jack 15 Help and Support 19 Hibernation 29 hinge, convertible, identifying 11 humidity specifications 43 I IEC 60950 compliance 23, 31 IEEE 1394 port, identifying 15 image, switching, among display devices 29 info button, identifying 16 input power specifications 44 inserting the battery 3 internal display switch, identifying 10 internal microphones, identifying 11 48 Index J jacks audio-in (microphone) 15 audio-out (headphone) 15 RJ-11 (modem) 14 RJ-45 (network 14 K keyboard light button, identifying 11, 13 keyboard light, identifying 11 keyboard, cleaning 45 keypad keys, identifying 12 keys esc 12 fn 12 function 12 keypad 12 Windows applications 12 Windows logo 12 L labels, service tag 33 LAN (local area network) 24 latch, battery release 17 latch, display release, identifying 13 lights battery 4, 9 camera 11, 13 caps lock 9 drive 9 keyboard 11 mute 9 num lock 9 power 6, 9 volume down 9 volume mute 9 volume up 9 wireless 16 M Media Card Reader, identifying 15 memory module compartment 17 microphone (audio-in) jack 15 microphones, internal, identifying 11 modem cable 1 modem, surge protection 22 monitor port, external 14 monitor, external 29 mute button, identifying 10 mute light, identifying 9 N network, connecting computer to 24 Norton Internet Security 21 num lock light, identifying 9 O operating environment specifications 43 operating system version number 33 overheating, computer 31 P pen slot, identifying 16 pointing stick buttons, identifying 10 pointing stick, identifying 10 ports 1394 15 external monitor 14 USB 15, 16 posture 23 power connector identifying 14 using 4 power cord connecting 4 identifying 1 power light behavior 6 identifying 9 power options 29 power specifications 44 power surges 22 power switch identifying 13 using 6 presentation button, identifying 10 privacy, protecting 21 Product Id 33 R reader, fingerprint, identifying 11, 15 recovery discs creating 7, 35 using 40 recovery partition 41 recovery points 39 registration number, operating system 33 regulatory information notices 23 release latch, battery 17 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 14 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 14 S safe computing practices 22 Safety & Comfort Guide 23 scheduling backups 39 security cable slot, identifying 15 serial number 33 service tag 33 setup, computer 1 shipping the computer 45 shutdown procedures 26 SIM slot, identifying 17 Sleep 29 slots ExpressCard 16 Media Card Reader 15 pen 16 security cable 15 SIM 17 Smart card reader, identifying 16 software antivirus 21 identifying 20 installing 25 setup 6 troubleshooting 29 updating 26 speaker, identifying 17 specifications altitude 43 input power 44 operating environment 43 startup problems, troubleshooting 28 surge protection 22 switches camera mode 11, 13 power 6, 13 wireless 16 system backup 38 system recovery points 39 T technical support 33 temperature safety considerations 23, 31 specifications 43 troubleshooting 31 Index 49 traveling with the computer 43, 45 troubleshooting blank screen 29 display problems 29 external device problems 31 overheating problems 31 resources 27 software problems 29 startup problems 28 unresponsive computer 30 wireless network problems 32 turning off the computer 26 turning on the computer 6, 28 U unresponsive computer, troubleshooting 30 USB ports, identifying 15, 16 user guides 19 V vents identifying 16, 17 overheating 31 precautions 23, 31 viruses 21 volume down light, identifying 9 volume mute button, identifying 10 volume mute light, identifying 9 volume scroll zone, identifying 10 volume up light, identifying 9 W Windows applications key, identifying 12 Windows logo key, identifying 12 Windows security button, identifying 14 wireless device compartment 17 wireless light, identifying 16 wireless network problems, troubleshooting 32 wireless switch, identifying 16 WLAN (wireless local area network) 24 WLAN antenna, identifying 18 work habits 23 workstation setup 23 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 24 WWAN antenna, identifying 18 50 Index

Drives User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431172-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Identifying installed drives 2 Handling drives 3 Optical drives Inserting an optical disc ........................................................................................................................ 5 Removing an optical disc when running on battery or external power ................................................. 6 Removing an optical disc when no computer power is available ......................................................... 7 4 Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter ..................................................................................................................... 8 Using Disk Cleanup .............................................................................................................................. 8 5 Replacing the hard drive Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 12 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the computer, select Start > My Computer. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer or external hard drive from one location to another, initiate Sleep, and allow the screen to clear. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while the optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to a medium. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove the medium from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. 2 Chapter 2 Handling drives ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Optical drives An optical drive, such as a DVD-ROM drive, supports optical discs (CDs and DVDs). These discs store or transport information and play music and movies. DVDs have a higher storage capacity than CDs. Optical drives can read from and select models can write to optical media as described in the following table. Optical drive type Read CD and DVD-ROM media Write to CD-

RW media Write to DVD RW/R media Write to DVD

+RW DL media Write label to LightScribe CD or DVD RW/R Write to DVD-

RAM media Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DVD-ROM Drive DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive with Double-

Layer support LightScribe DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive with Double-

Layer support NOTE Some of the optical drives listed may not be supported by your computer. The listed drives are not necessarily all of the supported optical drives. CAUTION To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of information, or loss of audio or video playback functionality, do not initiate Sleep or hibernation while reading or writing to a CD or DVD. ENWW 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

If Sleep or hibernation is accidentally initiated during playback of a disc, you may experience the following behaviors:

Your playback may be interrupted. You may see the following warning: Putting the computer into hibernation or standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue? Click No. You may need to restart the CD or DVD to resume audio and video playback. 4 Chapter 3 Optical drives ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting an optical disc 1. 2. 3. Turn on the computer. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the media tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges to avoid touching the flat surfaces and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the media tray. NOTE After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If you have not selected a media player, an AutoPlay dialog box opens. It prompts you to select how you want to use the media content. ENWW Inserting an optical disc 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Removing an optical disc when running on battery or external power 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the media tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the media tray and place the disc in a protective case. 6 Chapter 3 Optical drives ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Removing an optical disc when no computer power is available 1. 2. Insert the end of a paper clip (1) into the release access in the front bezel of the drive. Press in gently on the paper clip until the tray is released, and then pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 3. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the media tray and place the disc in a protective case. ENWW Removing an optical disc when no computer power is available 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that it can run more efficiently. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. 2. Click a volume for the hard drive you want to defragment, usually listed as (C:), and then click Defragment. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter online Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 8 Chapter 4 Improving hard drive performance ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

5 Replacing the hard drive CAUTION To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. NOTE You computer may look slightly different from the illustrations in this chapter. To remove the hard drive:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. With the hard drive bay toward you, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). 8. Lift the hard drive cover away from the computer (2). ENWW 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9. Remove the 2 hard drive screws (1) 10. Pull the hard drive tab up (2), and then lift the hard drive away from the computer. To install a hard drive:

1. Insert the hard drive into the hard drive bay. 2. Gently press the hard drive down until it snaps into place (1). 3. Replace the 2 hard drive screws (2). 4. Align the tabs (1) on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer. 5. Close the cover (2). 10 Chapter 5 Replacing the hard drive ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

6. Tighten the hard drive cover screws (3). ENWW 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A airport security devices 2 C CD inserting 5 removing, with power 6 removing, without power 7 CD drive 3 D Disk Cleanup 8 Disk Cleanup software 8 Disk Defragmenter 8 Disk Defragmenter software 8 disk performance 8 drives caring for 2 hard 9, 10 optical 3 See also hard drive, optical drive DVD inserting 5 removing, with power 6 removing, without power 7 DVD drive 3 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 8 Disk Defragmenter 8 O optical disc inserting 5 removing, with power 6 removing, without power 7 optical drive 3 S software Disk Cleanup 8 Disk Defragmenter 8 H hard disk drive hard drive installing 10 removing 9 replacing 9 installing 10 removing 9 replacing 9 12 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

External Media Cards User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431176-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Digital Media Slot cards Inserting a digital card .......................................................................................................................... 2 Stopping and removing a digital card ................................................................................................... 3 2 ExpressCards Configuring an ExpressCard ................................................................................................................ 4 Inserting an ExpressCard ..................................................................................................................... 5 Stopping and removing an ExpressCard .............................................................................................. 6 Index ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Digital Media Slot cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. The Digital Media Slot supports the following digital card formats:

Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MSP) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital Input/Output (SD I/O) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture Card (XD) xD-Picture Card (XD) Type M CAUTION To avoid damaging the digital card or the computer, do not insert any type of adapter into the Digital Media Slot. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting a digital card CAUTION To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Gently slide the card into the Digital Media Slot until the card is seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE The first time you insert a digital card, the "Installing device driver software"

message is displayed in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2 Chapter 1 Digital Media Slot cards ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Stopping and removing a digital card CAUTION To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop a digital card before removing it. 1. Close all files and applications that are associated with the digital card. NOTE To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. Stop the digital card:

a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the digital card listing. c. Click Stop, and then OK. 3. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). ENWW Stopping and removing a digital card 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 ExpressCards An ExpressCard is a next-generation, high-performance PC Card that is inserted into the ExpressCard slot. Like standard PC Cards, ExpressCards are designed to conform to the standard specifications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). Configuring an ExpressCard Install only the software required for your device. If you are instructed by the ExpressCard manufacturer to install device drivers:

Install only the device drivers for your operating system. Do not install other software, such as card services, socket services, or enablers, supplied by the ExpressCard manufacturer. 4 Chapter 2 ExpressCards ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting an ExpressCard CAUTION To prevent damage to the computer and external media cards, do not insert an ExpressCard into a PC Card slot or a PC Card into an ExpressCard slot. CAUTION To prevent damage to the connectors:

Use minimal force when inserting an ExpressCard. Do not move or transport the computer when an ExpressCard is in use. The ExpressCard slot may contain a protective insert. The insert must be removed before you can insert an ExpressCard. To release and remove the protective insert:

1. 2. Press in on the insert (1) to unlock it. Pull the insert out of the slot (2). To insert an ExpressCard:

1. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Gently slide the card into the ExpressCard slot until the card is seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE The first time you insert an ExpressCard, the Installing device driver software message is displayed in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE An inserted ExpressCard uses power even when idle. To conserve power, stop or remove an ExpressCard when it is not in use. ENWW Inserting an ExpressCard 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Stopping and removing an ExpressCard CAUTION To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop an ExpressCard before removing it. 1. Close all programs and complete all activities that are associated with the ExpressCard. NOTE To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. Stop the ExpressCard:

a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the ExpressCard listing. c. Click Stop, and then OK. 3. Release and remove the ExpressCard:

a. Gently press in on the ExpressCard (1) to unlock it. b. Pull the ExpressCard out of the slot (2). 6 Chapter 2 ExpressCards ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index C configuring ExpressCards 4 D digital card defined 1 inserting 2 removing 3 stopping 3 E ExpressCard configuring 4 defined 4 inserting 5 removing 6 removing insert 5 stopping 6 ENWW Index 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

External Devices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431173-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Using a USB device Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................................... 2 Stopping a USB device ........................................................................................................................ 2 2 Using the expansion port Index ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that connects an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub, to the computer or to an optional expansion product or docking device. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The computer has 3 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices To add more USB ports, attach an optional hub, expansion product, or docking device. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting a USB device CAUTION To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device. To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. The operating system will issue a sound to indicate that a device has been detected. NOTE The first time you connect a USB device, the "Installing device driver software" message is displayed in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Stopping a USB device CAUTION To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop the USB device before removing it. CAUTION To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to disconnect the USB device. To stop a USB device:

1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon

(< or <<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE If the USB device is not listed, you do not have to stop the device before you remove it. 3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 2 Chapter 1 Using a USB device ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Using the expansion port The expansion port connects the computer to an optional expansion product. An optional expansion product provides additional ports and connectors that can be used with the computer. ENWW 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index C cables USB 2 E expansion port 3 H hubs 1 P ports expansion 3 USB 1 U USB cable, connecting 2 USB devices connecting 2 description 1 stopping 2 USB hubs 1 USB ports, identifying 1 4 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Memory Modules User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431177-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents Adding or replacing a memory module Index ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Adding or replacing a memory module The computer has one memory module compartment, which is located on the bottom of the computer. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by adding a memory module to the vacant expansion memory module slot or by upgrading the existing memory module in the primary memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To add or replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in the Sleep state, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. Loosen the 2 memory module compartment screws (1). ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

8. Lift the memory module compartment cover (2) away from the computer. 9. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 2 Adding or replacing a memory module ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10. Insert a new memory module:

a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. CAUTION To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. 11. Align the tabs (1) on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the computer. 12. Close the cover (2). 13. Tighten the 2 memory module compartment screws (3). ENWW 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

14. Replace the battery. 15. Reconnect external power and external devices. 16. Turn on the computer. 4 Adding or replacing a memory module ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index M memory adding memory modules 1 replacing memory modules 1 upgrading memory modules 1 memory module adding 1 inserting 3 removing 2 replacing 1 upgrading 1 cover removing 2 replacing 3 memory module compartment ENWW Index 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431178-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Using multimedia hardware Using the audio features ...................................................................................................................... 1 Using the audio-in (microphone) jack .................................................................................. 2 Using the audio-out (headphone) jack ................................................................................. 2 Using S/PDIF digital audio (select models only) .................................................................. 2 Adjusting the volume ........................................................................................................... 3 Using the QuickPlay buttons ................................................................................................................ 4 Media button ........................................................................................................................ 4 DVD button .......................................................................................................................... 5 Using the video features ....................................................................................................................... 6 Using the external monitor port ............................................................................................ 6 Using the S-Video-out jack .................................................................................................. 7 Using the camera ................................................................................................................................ 8 Capturing and streaming video ............................................................................................ 9 Capturing video ................................................................................................... 9 Streaming video with an instant message program ............................................ 9 Taking still photographs with the integrated camera ......................................................... 10 Adjusting camera properties .............................................................................................. 10 Using an optical drive ........................................................................................................................ 12 Identifying the installed optical drive .................................................................................. 12 Inserting an optical disc ..................................................................................................... 12 Removing an optical disc when running on battery or external power .............................. 13 Removing an optical disc when no computer power is available ....................................... 14 Using the media activity functions ...................................................................................................... 15 Using the media activity hotkeys ....................................................................................... 15 Using the media activity buttons ........................................................................................ 16 Previous/rewind button ...................................................................................... 16 Play/pause button ............................................................................................. 16 Next/fast forward button .................................................................................... 17 Stop button ........................................................................................................ 17 2 Working with multimedia software Opening preinstalled multimedia software ......................................................................................... 19 Installing multimedia software from a disc .......................................................................................... 19 Using multimedia software ................................................................................................................. 19 Preventing playback disruptions ......................................................................................................... 20 Changing DVD region settings ........................................................................................................... 21 Observing the copyright warning ........................................................................................................ 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 22 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Using multimedia hardware Using the audio features The following illustration and table describe the audio features of the computer. Component

(1) Internal microphones (2) Description Record sound.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Speakers (2) Audio-in (microphone) jack Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-out (headphone) S/PDIF jack NOTE A microphone icon next to the microphone opening indicates that the computer has an internal microphone. Produce sound. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Provides enhanced audio performance, including surround sound and other high-end audio output. ENWW Using the audio features 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the audio-in (microphone) jack The computer is equipped with a stereo (dual-channel) microphone jack that supports an optional stereo array or monaural microphone. Using sound recording software with external microphones allows for stereo recordings. When connecting a microphone to the microphone jack, use a microphone with a 3.5-mm plug. Using the audio-out (headphone) jack WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. CAUTION To prevent possible damage to an external device, do not plug a single sound channel (monaural) connector into the headphone jack. In addition to connecting headphones, the headphone jack is used to connect the audio input function of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. When connecting a device to the headphone jack, use only a 3.5-mm stereo plug. When a device is connected to the headphone jack, the speakers are disabled. Using S/PDIF digital audio (select models only) S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) or digital audio provides enhanced audio performance, including surround sound and other high-end audio output. For digital audio connections, connect the S/PDIF digital audio plug to the digital audio connector on your audio/video equipment. NOTE In order to use S/PDIF with the headphone jack, you will need an optional mini TOS link cable and/or adapter. 2 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

Computer volume buttons:

To decrease volume, press the volume down button (1). To mute or restore volume, press the mute button (2). To increase volume, press the volume up button (3). Microsoft Windows volume control:

a. Click the Volume icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Select the Mute check box to mute the volume. or a. Double-click the Volume icon in the notification area. b. In the Master Volume column, increase or decrease the volume by moving the Volume slider up or down. You can also adjust the balance or mute the volume. If the Volume icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices. b. Click the Volume tab. c. Select the Place volume icon in the taskbar check box. d. Click Apply. Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. ENWW Using the audio features 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the QuickPlay buttons Media button and DVD button functions vary, depending on the software installed on your computer. The media button (1) and the DVD button (2) allow you to listen to music, play DVDs, and watch movies with the touch of a button. Media button Computer power state Media button function On or off Opens a music program or the Media menu so that you can select a multimedia program. NOTE Press the power button to exit the program. Standby Exits standby. 4 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

DVD button Computer power state DVD button function On Off Opens the default DVD program so that you can play a DVD in the optical drive. NOTE Press the power button to exit the program. Opens QuickPlay so that you can play a DVD in the optical drive. NOTE Press the power button to exit QuickPlay. Standby Exits standby. ENWW Using the QuickPlay buttons 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the video features Using the external monitor port The external monitor port connects an external display device, such as a television, an external monitor, or a projector, to the computer. To connect a display device, connect the device cable to the external monitor port. NOTE If a properly connected external display device does not display an image, press fn+f4 to transfer the image to the device. 6 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the S-Video-out jack The 7-pin S-Video-out jack connects the computer to an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. To transmit video signals through the S-Video-out jack, you need an S-Video cable, available from most electronics retailers. If you are combining audio and video functions, such as playing a DVD movie on your computer and displaying it on your television, you also need a standard audio cable, available from most electronics retailers, to connect to the headphone jack. The computer can support one S-Video device connected to the S-Video-out jack, while simultaneously supporting an image on the computer display or on any other supported external display. NOTE The S-Video connection provides a higher quality image than a composite-video connection. To connect a video device to the S-Video-out jack:

1. Plug one end of the S-Video cable into the S-Video-out jack on the computer. NOTE If the S-Video-out jack on the computer is not accessible because the computer is docked in an optional docking device, connect the S-Video cable to the S-Video-out jack on the docking device. 2. 3. Plug the other end of the cable into the video device, as instructed in the user guide included with the device. Press the fn+f4 keys to switch the image between display devices connected to the computer. ENWW Using the video features 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the camera Select computer models include an integrated camera, located on the top of the display. The camera can be used with a variety of software for the following functions:

Capturing video. Streaming video with instant message software. Taking still photos. The camera light (1) turns on when video software accesses the camera (2). For optimum performance, observe the following guidelines while using the integrated camera:

Be sure that you have the latest version of an instant message program before attempting a video conversation. Your integrated camera may not work properly across some network firewalls. If you are having trouble viewing or sending video to someone on another LAN or outside your network firewall, contact your network administrator for assistance. Whenever possible, place bright light sources behind the camera and out of the picture area. 8 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Capturing and streaming video To illustrate how each camera feature works, the following examples use specific software, not available on all computers. Select Start > All Programs to locate the video software installed on your computer, and refer to the individual program's online Help for further information. Capturing video You can capture video for playback at a later time. The following example uses MovieMaker software:

1. Select Start > Programs > Windows MovieMaker. 2. Click Capture from Video Device. The Video Capture Wizard opens. 3. Click the listing for the integrated camera from the list of available devices. 4. Check the microphone and camera settings, and adjust if necessary. 5. Click Next. 6. 7. Select the file name and path where you want to save the video file, and then click Next. Select the video settings, and then click Next. 8. Click Start Capture. When you finish recording, click Stop Capture. 9. Click Finish to save the video file and close the wizard. Streaming video with an instant message program You can send real-time video through an instant message program. The following example uses Windows Messenger:

1. Open Windows Messenger by double-clicking the icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. 3. Sign in to Windows Messenger. Select Actions > Voice/Video > Start a Video Conversation. 4. Click the name of the person you want to connect with, and then click OK. An instant message window is displayed, and the camera image is displayed next to the message area. 5. If the Audio and Video Tuning Wizard opens, follow the instructions to adjust your camera and microphone settings. ENWW Using the camera 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Taking still photographs with the integrated camera 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Scanners and Cameras. 2. Double-click the listing for the integrated camera, and then click Next. 3. Click Take Picture. 4. Follow the directions on the Picture wizard to select any of the following options:

Publish the pictures to a Web site. Order prints of the pictures. Save the pictures on your computer. Adjusting camera properties You can adjust the following camera properties:

BrightnessControls the amount of light that is incorporated into the image. A higher brightness setting creates a brighter image; a lower brightness setting creates a darker image. ContrastControls the difference between lighter and darker areas on the image. A higher contrast setting intensifies the image; a lower contrast setting maintains more of the original informations dynamic range but leads to a flatter image. HueControls the aspect of color that distinguishes it from another color (what makes a color red, green, or blue). Hue is distinct from saturation, which measures the intensity of the hue. SaturationControls the strength of color in the final image. A higher saturation setting creates a bolder image; a lower saturation setting creates a more subtle image. SharpnessControls the definition of edges in an image. A higher sharpness setting creates a more defined image; a lower sharpness setting creates a softer image. GammaControls the contrast affecting the mid-level grays or midtones of an image. Adjusting the gamma of an image allows you to change brightness values of the middle range of gray tones without dramatically altering the shadows and highlights. A lower Gamma setting makes greys look black, and makes dark colors even darker. White BalanceControls the color temperature of the dominant light sources. This enables white objects in the image to appear truly white. The white balance settings in the Properties dialog box are displayed as WB (Red) and WB (Blue). A higher white balance setting increases the concentration of the color (red or blue); a lower white balance setting decreases the concentration of the selected color. ExposureControls the relative amount of light that enters the camera sensor. A higher exposure setting allows more light; a lower exposure setting allows less light. GainControls the intensity range, thus altering the color contrast of the image. A higher gain setting stretches the intensity range; a lower gain setting shrinks the intensity. Light SourceControls the settings to adjust the camera exposure for the ambient light. FlipReverses the captured image vertically. MirrorReverses the captured image horizontally. 10 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

PrivacyTurns off the capture function. Low LightLowers the frame rate automatically in a poor lighting environment to maintain the brightness of the captured image. The Properties dialog box is accessible from various programs that use the integrated camera, usually from a configuration, settings, or properties menu. ENWW Using the camera 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using an optical drive Depending on the type of optical drive and software installed in your computer, the optical drive plays, copies, and creates CDs or DVDs. Identifying the installed optical drive

Select Start > My Computer. The type of optical drive installed in the computer is displayed under Devices with Removable Storage. Inserting an optical disc 1. Turn on the computer. 2. 3. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the media tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges to avoid touching the flat surfaces and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the media tray. NOTE After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If you have not selected a media player, an AutoPlay dialog box opens. It prompts you to select how you want to use the media content. 12 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Removing an optical disc when running on battery or external power 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the media tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the media tray and place the disc in a protective case. ENWW Using an optical drive 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Removing an optical disc when no computer power is available 1. Insert the end of a paper clip (1) into the release access in the front bezel of the drive. 2. Press in gently on the paper clip until the tray is released, and then pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 3. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the media tray and place the disc in a protective case. 14 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the media activity functions The media activity hotkeys and the media activity buttons (select models only) control the play of an audio CD or a DVD that is inserted into the optical drive. Using the media activity hotkeys A media activity hotkey is a combination of the fn key (1) and a function key. NOTE To control the play of a video disc, use the media activity controls in your video disc player program. To play, pause, or resume an audio CD or a DVD, press fn+f9 (2). To stop an audio CD or a DVD that is playing, press fn+f10 (3). To play the previous track of an audio CD or the previous chapter of a DVD that is playing, press fn+f11 (4). To play the next track of an audio CD or the next chapter of a DVD that is playing, press fn+f12

(5). ENWW Using the media activity functions 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the media activity buttons The following illustration and tables describe the functions of the media activity buttons when a disc is inserted in the optical drive. Previous/rewind button (1) Play/pause button (2) Next/fast forward button (3) Stop button (4) Previous/rewind button Disc status Playing Playing Button Function Previous/rewind button Plays a previous track. fn + previous/rewind button Rewinds the playback. Play/pause button Disc status Not playing Playing Button Play/pause button Play/pause button Function Plays the disc. Pauses the playback. 16 Chapter 1 Using multimedia hardware ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Next/fast forward button Disc status Playing Playing Stop button Disc status Playing Button Function Next/fast forward button Plays the next track or chapter. fn + next/fast forward button Fast forwards the playback. Button Stop button Function Stops the playback. ENWW Using the media activity functions 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Working with multimedia software The computer includes preinstalled multimedia software. Some computer models also include additional multimedia software on an optical disc. Depending on the hardware and software included with the computer, the following multimedia tasks may be supported:

Playing digital media, including audio and video CDs, audio and video DVDs, and Internet radio Creating or copying data CDs Creating, editing, and burning audio CDs Creating, editing, and burning a video or movie to a DVD or video CD CAUTION To prevent loss of information or damage to a disc:

Before writing to a disc, connect the computer to a reliable external power source. Do not write to a disc while the computer is running on battery power. Before writing to a disc, close all open programs except the disc software you are using. Do not copy directly from a source disc to a destination disc or from a network drive to a destination disc. Instead, copy from a source disc or network drive to your hard drive, and then copy from your hard drive to the destination disc. Do not use the computer keyboard or move the computer while the computer is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. NOTE For information about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturer's instructions that may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the software manufacturer's Web site. 18 Chapter 2 Working with multimedia software ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Opening preinstalled multimedia software 1. Select Start > All Programs. 2. Double-click the program that you want to open. Installing multimedia software from a disc 1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Using multimedia software 1. 2. 3. Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player to play an audio CD, click Windows Media Player. NOTE Some programs may be located in subfolders. Insert the media disc, such as an audio CD, into the optical drive. Follow the instructions on the screen. or 1. Insert the media disc, such as an audio CD, into the optical drive. An AutoPlay dialog box opens. 2. Click a multimedia task from the list of tasks. NOTE The AutoPlay dialog box allows you to select a multimedia program for the media disc. After you select a program from the list, click the Always do the selected action box. 3. Click OK. ENWW Opening preinstalled multimedia software 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Preventing playback disruptions To reduce the possibility of playback disruption:

Save your work and close all open programs before playing a CD or a DVD. Do not connect or disconnect hardware while playing a disc. Do not initiate standby or hibernation while playing a disc. Otherwise, you may see the warning message Putting the computer into hibernation or standby might stop the playback. Do you want to continue?

If this message is displayed, click No. After you click No:

Playback may resume. or Playback may stop and the screen may clear. To return to playing the CD or DVD, press the power button and then restart the disc. 20 Chapter 2 Working with multimedia software ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Changing DVD region settings Most DVDs that contain copyrighted files also contain region codes. The region codes help protect copyrights internationally. You can play a DVD containing a region code only if the region code on the DVD matches the region setting on your DVD drive. CAUTION The region settings on your DVD drive can be changed only 5 times. The region setting you select the fifth time becomes the permanent region setting on the DVD drive. The number of allowable region changes remaining on the drive is displayed in the Changes remaining box on the DVD Region tab. The number in the field includes the fifth and permanent change. To change settings through the operating system:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. Right-click in the window and select Properties > Hardware tab > Device Manager. 3. Click DVD/CD-ROM drives, right-click the DVD drive for which you want to change region settings, and then click Properties. 4. Make the desired changes on the DVD Region tab. 5. Click OK. Observing the copyright warning It is a criminal offense, under applicable copyright laws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-

protected material, including computer programs, films, broadcasts, and sound recordings. Do not use this computer for such purposes. ENWW Changing DVD region settings 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A audio features 1 audio-in (microphone) jack 1, 2 audio-out (headphone) jack 1, 2 B buttons DVD 4 Media 4 next/fast forward 16 play/pause 16 previous/rewind 16 stop 16 volume mute 3 C camera capturing video 9 identifying 8 properties 10 taking still photographs 10 CD inserting 12 playing 20 protecting 18 removing, with power 13 removing, without power 14 writing to 18 copyright warning 21 D DVD changing region setting 21 inserting 12 playing 20 protecting 18 removing, with power 13 removing, without power 14 writing to 18 DVD button 4 P ports external monitor 6 programs multimedia 18 using 19 projector, connecting 6 protecting playback 20 Q QuickPlay 4 QuickPlay buttons 4 R region codes, DVD 21 S S-Video-out jack 7 S/PDIF digital audio 2 software multimedia 18 using 19 speakers 1 T TV 2 V VCR 2 volume mute button 3 volume, adjusting 3 DVD region settings 21 E earbuds 1 external monitor port 6 H headphones 1 J jack jacks audio-in (microphone) 1 audio-out (headphone) 1 audio-in (microphone) 2 audio-out (headphone) 2 S-Video-out 7 M media activity buttons 16 media activity hotkeys 15 Media button 4 microphones, supported 2 monitor, connecting 6 multimedia software described 18 using 19 mute button 3 O optical disc inserting 12 removing, with power 13 removing, without power 14 writing to 18 optical drive playing 20 protecting 18 22 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Notebook Tour User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431179-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Top components TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 2 Keys ..................................................................................................................................................... 3 Hotkey quick reference ......................................................................................................................... 4 3 Display Display components ............................................................................................................................. 5 Quick Launch buttons ........................................................................................................................... 6 Media buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Display lights ........................................................................................................................................ 8 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................... 9 WWAN antenna ................................................................................................................................. 10 4 Front components 5 Rear components 6 Right-side components 7 Left-side components 8 Bottom components 9 Additional hardware components 10 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 20 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select Start > Computer > Properties. In the left pane, click Hardware and Device Settings. In the Windows Security dialog box, click Allow. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Top components TouchPad Component

(1) TouchPad light

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

TouchPad on/off button Description Blue: TouchPad is enabled. Amber: TouchPad is disabled. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down. Enables/disables the TouchPad.

*This table describes factory settings. To view and change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel >

Hardware and Sound > Mouse. In the Windows Security dialog box, click Allow. 2 Chapter 2 Top components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Keys 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Hotkey quick reference To perform this function Display information. Clear system information. Open the Help and Support Center. Open the Print Options window. Open a Web browser. Alternate between computer display and external display. Initiate the Sleep state. Initiate QuickLock. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Play, pause, or resume an audio CD or a DVD. Stop an audio CD or a DVD. Press fn+esc fn+esc or press enter fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f5 fn+f6 fn+f7 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 Play the previous track or section on an audio CD or a DVD. fn+f11 Play the next track on an audio CD or a DVD. fn+12 4 Chapter 2 Top components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Display Display components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Rotating hinge Internal display switch Swivels the display and converts the computer from notebook mode into tablet PC mode or vice versa. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the computer is turned on. Fingerprint reader Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Integrated camera (select models only) Records video and captures still photographs. Display release latch Opens the computer. ENWW Display components 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Quick Launch buttons Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Rotate button Mobility Center button Media button Description Switches the image between landscape and portrait orientation. Press to open Mobility Center. When the computer is On, the media button opens the music program or Media menu, allowing you to select a multimedia program. Off, the media button opens the music program or the Media menu, allowing you to select a multimedia program. In the Sleep state, the media button resumes from Sleep into Windows.

(4) DVD button When the computer is On, the DVD button opens the default DVD program to start a DVD in the optical drive. Off, the DVD button opens QuickPlay to start a DVD in the optical drive. If the QuickPlay software is not installed, the computer starts in Windows. In Hibernation, opens QuickPlay to start a DVD in the optical drive. If the QuickPlay software is not installed, the computer resumes from Hibernation. NOTE Refer to the QuickPlay online Help for details on using QuickPlay. 6 Chapter 3 Display ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Media buttons Component Description

(1) Previous/rewind button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(2) Play/pause button Press to play the previous track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to rewind. When a disc is in the optical drive and is Not playing, press to play the disc. Playing, press to pause the disc.

(3) Next/fast forward button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(4) Stop button Press once to play the next track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to fast forward. When a disc is playing in the optical drive, press to stop the current disc activity. ENWW Media buttons 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Display lights Component

(1) Power light*

(2) Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition.

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Drive light Rotate button light Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. On: The image is in landscape mode. [PLEASE VERIFY]

Mobility Center button light On: Mobility Center is open. [PLEASE VERIFY]

Media button light DVD button light On: QuickPlay media mode is open. [PLEASE VERIFY]

On: QuickPlay DVD mode is open. [PLEASE VERIFY]

8 Chapter 3 Display ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless antennae (select models only) On select computer models, at least 2 antennae send and receive signals from one or more wireless devices. These antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to your region's section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. NOTE For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

WWAN antenna The wireless antenna inside the display enclosure allows you to connect to a wireless wide-area network

(WWAN), and then to the Internet, using the integrated HP Broadband Wireless module and service from a supported cellular network operator. For more information on HP Broadband Wireless and how to sign up for service, refer to the HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started guide included with your computer. 10 Chapter 3 Display ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 Front components Component

(1)

(2) Display release latch Power button*

Description Opens the computer. When the computer is Off, press to turn on the computer. On, press to enter Hibernation. In the Sleep state, briefly press to exit Sleep. In Hibernation, briefly press to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. Blue: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is turned on. Amber: an integrated wireless device is turned off. Links the computer to the HP Remote Control. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Produce sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio.

(3) Wireless light

(4)

(5)

(6) Consumer infrared lens Audio-in (microphone) jack Audio-out (headphone) jack ENWW 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

5 Rear components Component

(1) Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-11 (modem) jack USB port Security cable slot Connects a modem cable. Connects an optional USB device. Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 12 Chapter 5 Rear components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

6 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Previous/rewind button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(2) Play/pause button Press to play the previous track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to rewind. When a disc is in the optical drive and is Not playing, press to play the disc. Playing, press to pause the disc.

(3) Next/fast forward button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Stop button Pen holder USB port Pen tether RJ-45 (network) jack Expansion port 3 Press once to play the next track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to fast forward. When a disc is playing in the optical drive, press to stop the current disc activity. Secures the pen to the computer. Connects an optional USB device. Connects the pen tether Connects a network cable. Connects the computer to an optional expansion product. ENWW 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(10)

(11) External monitor port S-Video-out jack NOTE The computer has only one expansion port. The term expansion port 3 describes the type of expansion port. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card.

(12) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 14 Chapter 6 Right-side components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7 Left-side components Component Power connector ExpressCard slot Digital Media Slot

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Digital Media Slot light Optical drive On: A digital card is being accessed. Reads an optical disc. Optical drive release button Releases the optical drive tray. Description Connects an AC adapter. Supports optional ExpressCard/54 cards. Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Secure Digital Input/

Output (SD I/O), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSP), xD-

Picture Card (XD), xD-Picture Card (XD) Type M. ENWW 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

8 Bottom components Component

(1) Vents (3) Description Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. Optical drive release latch Releases the optical drive from the drive bay. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slots. Mini Card compartment Holds a wireless LAN device (select models only). 16 Chapter 8 Bottom components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description NOTE To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card device authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace the device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care through the Help and Support Center.

(6)

(7) Battery release latch Battery bay Releases the battery from the battery bay. Holds the battery. ENWW 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only) Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 18 Chapter 9 Additional hardware components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact Customer Care. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Microsoft Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed inside the hard drive bay. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the hard drive bay. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. ENWW 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A AC adapter, identifying 18 antennae 9 applications key, Windows 3 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 11 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 11 B battery bay 17, 19 battery light, identifying 8 battery release latch, identifying 17 battery, identifying 18 bays battery 17, 19 hard drive 16 Bluetooth label 19 buttons DVD 6 media 6 next/fast forward 7, 13 play/pause 7, 13 power 11 previous/rewind 7, 13 stop 7, 13 TouchPad 2 TouchPad on/off 2 C cable, RJ-11 (modem) 18 Certificate of Authenticity label 19 compartments memory module 16 Mini Card 16 components additional hardware 18 bottom 16 display 5 front 11 left-side 15 rear 12 right-side 13 top 2 connector, power 15 cord, power 18 D Digital Media Slot light, identifying 15 Digital Media Slot, identifying 15 display release latch 5, 11 display switch, identifying 5 drive light, identifying 8 drives hard 16 DVD button, identifying 6 E esc key, identifying 3 expansion port, identifying 13 ExpressCard slot, identifying 15 external monitor port, identifying 14 F fingerprint reader 5 fn key, identifying 3 function keys, identifying 3 H hard drive bay, identifying 16 headphone (audio-out) jack 11 hotkeys, quick reference 4 I infrared lens, identifying 11 integrated camera light, identifying 5 internal display switch, identifying 5 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 11 audio-out (headphone) 11 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 13 S-Video-out 14 K keypad keys, identifying 3 keys esc 3 fn 3 function 3 keypad 3 Windows applications 3 Windows logo 3 L labels Bluetooth 19 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 19 modem approval 19 regulatory 19 service tag 19 wireless certification 19 WLAN 19 latch, battery release 17 latches display release 5, 11 lights battery 8 Digital Media Slot 15 drive 8 integrated camera 5 power 8 20 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

TouchPad 2 wireless 11 M media activity buttons, identifying 7, 13 media button, identifying 6 memory module compartment, identifying 16 microphone (audio-in) jack 11 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 19 Mini Card compartment, identifying 16 modem approval label 19 modem cable adapter, identifying 18 monitor port, external 14 N next/fast forward button, identifying 7, 13 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 19 Product Key 19 P play/pause button, identifying 7, 13 ports expansion 13 external monitor 14 USB 13 power button, identifying 11 power connector, identifying 15 power cord, identifying 18 power light, identifying 8 Previous/rewind button, identifying 7, 13 Product Key 19 product name and number, computer 19 R reader, fingerprint 5 regulatory information modem approval label 19 regulatory label 19 wireless certification labels 19 release latch, battery 17 RJ-11 (modem) cable, identifying 18 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 13 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 14 scrolling regions, TouchPad 2 security cable slot, identifying 12 serial number, computer 19 service tag 19 slots Digital Media 15 ExpressCard 15 memory module 16 security cable 12 stop button, identifying 7, 13 T TouchPad buttons 2 identifying 2 scrolling regions 2 TouchPad light, identifying 2 TouchPad on/off button 2 traveling with the computer modem approval label 19 wireless certification labels 19 U USB ports, identifying 13 V vents, identifying 12, 14, 16 W Windows applications key, identifying 3 Windows logo key, identifying 3 wireless antennae 9 wireless certification label 19 wireless light, identifying 11 WLAN device 19 WLAN label 19 WWAN device 10 ENWW Index 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Pointing Devices and Keyboard User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431181-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Using the Pointing Devices Using the TouchPad ............................................................................................................................. 1 Using the pointing stick ........................................................................................................................ 2 Setting pointing device preferences ..................................................................................................... 2 Connecting an external mouse ............................................................................................................. 2 Using the pen ....................................................................................................................................... 3 Identifying the pen components ........................................................................................... 3 Holding the pen .................................................................................................................... 3 Performing mouse clicks with the pen ................................................................................. 3 Performing other procedures with the pen ........................................................................... 3 Pressure-sensitivity .............................................................................................................. 4 Calibrating the pen ............................................................................................................... 4 Using the pen holder ............................................................................................................ 5 Setting pen preferences ....................................................................................................... 5 Using the touchscreen (select models only) ......................................................................................... 6 2 Using the keyboard Using hotkeys ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Displaying system information (fn+esc) ............................................................................... 8 Opening the Help and Support Center (fn+f1) ..................................................................... 8 Opening the Print Options window (fn+f2) ........................................................................... 8 Opening a Web browser (fn+f3) .......................................................................................... 9 Switching the screen image (fn+f4) ..................................................................................... 9 Initiating standby (fn+f5) .................................................................................................... 10 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................................ 10 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) ................................................................................ 10 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) ................................................................................. 10 Playing, pausing or resuming an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f9) ............................................ 11 Stopping an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f10) .......................................................................... 11 Playing previous track or section of an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f11) ................................. 11 Playing next track or section of an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f12) ....................................... 11 Using the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel ............................................................................ 12 Opening the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel ....................................................... 12 Setting button preferences ................................................................................................. 12 Setting Zoom preferences ................................................................................................. 13 Setting other preferences .................................................................................................. 13 3 Using the keypads Using the embedded numeric keypad ................................................................................................ 15 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad .................................................... 15 Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad .............................................. 15 Using an external numeric keypad ..................................................................................................... 15 4 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, and touchscreen (select models only) Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 17 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Using the Pointing Devices Using the TouchPad The following illustration and table describe the computer TouchPad. Component

(1) TouchPad light

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

TouchPad on/off button Description Blue: TouchPad is enabled. Amber: TouchPad is disabled. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down. Enables/disables the TouchPad.

*This table describes factory settings. To view and change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel >

Hardware and Sound > Mouse. In the Windows Security dialog box, click Allow. To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. ENWW Using the TouchPad 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Using the pointing stick Press the pointing stick in the direction you want to move the pointer on the screen. Use the left and right pointing stick buttons as you would the left and right buttons on an external mouse. Setting pointing device preferences Mouse Properties in Microsoft Windows allows you to customize pointing device settings such as mouse speed preferences. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >

Mouse. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the computer using one of the USB ports on the computer. A USB mouse can also be connected to the system using the ports on an optional docking device or expansion product. 2 Chapter 1 Using the Pointing Devices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the pen You can write with the pen in pen-specific programs, such as the Tablet PC Input Panel [DOES SPUTNIK SUPPORT THIS?], in all Microsoft Office applications, and in most other Windows programs and utilities. The information you write on the screen with the pen can be filed, searched, and shared among most Windows programs. Identifying the pen components The pen interacts with the computer whenever the tip (1) of the pen is approximately 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) from the screen. [IS THIS TRUE FOR SPUTNIK OR DOES THE PEN HAVE TO TOUCH THE SCREEN?]

The pen tether eyelet (2) allows you to connect a tether from the pen to the computer. Holding the pen Hold the pen as if you were writing with a standard pen or pencil. Position the pen in your hand so that you will not accidentally press the pen button. As you monitor the movements of the pen, focus on the pointer, not on the tip of the pen. Performing mouse clicks with the pen To select an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse:

Tap the item with the tip of the pen. To double-click an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse:

Tap the item twice with the tip of the pen.

[HOW DOES ONE RIGHT-CLICK? DRAG & DROP?]

Performing other procedures with the pen To display the pointer location, hold the pen tip immediately over any location on the screen without touching the screen with the pen tip. To display the menu options related to an item on the screen, tap the screen with the pen tip. To write with the pen, write on the screen with the tip of the pen. To press a pen-activated button, tap the button with the tip of the pen. ENWW Using the pen 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Pressure-sensitivity

[DOES THIS SECTION APPLY?] The pen is equipped with a pressure-sensitive feature. This means that you can manipulate the pen to create lines of various thickness, depending upon the amount of pressure you use to write. NOTE This feature is only available if the Tablet PC Input Panel software program is enabled. Calibrating the pen The pen can function at the default calibration or at a calibration set by another user. However, HP highly recommends that you use the pen only while it is calibrated to your personal handwriting and mouse action motions. Calibration optimizes pen performance for all users and particularly for left-handed users. To calibrate the pen: [THESE STEPS MAY CHANGE WITH VISTA]

1. 2. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Tablet and Pen Settings >

Settings tab. Select Calibrate. Follow the instructions on the screen. Tap the pen in the exact center of each of the calibration markers. The calibration markers are displayed on the screen as plus signs (+). Be sure to calibrate the pen for use in both portrait and landscape orientations. NOTE You can display information about any setting in the Tablet and Pen Settings window by selecting the question mark button in the upper-right corner of the window, and then select a setting. 4 Chapter 1 Using the Pointing Devices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the pen holder To protect the pen when you are not using it, insert the pen, tip first, into the pen holder on the computer.

[I JUST REALIZED THIS GRAPHIC SHOWS THE COMPUTER UPSIDE DOWN. I'LL HAVE IT CORRECTED FORTHE NEXT REVIEW.]

Setting pen preferences

[THESE STEPS MAY CHANGE WITH VISTA]

Pen preferences are set in the Tablet and Pen Settings window of the operating system. The preferences include settings that optimize handwriting recognition and the location of on-screen menus for either right-handed or left-handed users. To access the pen settings:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Tablet and Pen Settings > Pen Options tab. The preferences you set in the Tablet and Pen Settings window are specific to the pen and the computer. Pointing device preferences, such as pointer speed, click speed, and mouse trails, are set in the Mouse Properties window. These preferences apply to any pointing device in the system. To access Mouse Properties:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. ENWW Using the pen 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the touchscreen (select models only) The touchscreen (select models only) allow you to make selections or activate items on the screen using your fingers. CAUTION To prevent damage to the touchscreen:

Do not use your fingernails or other sharp objects to make selections. Do not slide your finger or any other object across the screen. To select an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse:

Lightly tap the item with your finger. To double-click an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse:

Lightly tap the item twice with your finger. 6 Chapter 1 Using the Pointing Devices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and either the esc key (2) or one of the function keys (3). The icons on the f1 through f12 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Function Display system information. Clear system information. Open the Help and Support Center. Open the Print Options window. Open a Web browser. Alternate between computer display and external display. Initiate standby. Initiate QuickLock. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Play, pause, or resume an audio CD or a DVD. Hotkey fn+esc fn+esc or press enter fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f5 fn+f6 fn+f7 fn+f8 fn+f9 ENWW Using hotkeys 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Function Stop an audio CD or a DVD. Hotkey fn+f10 Play the previous track or section on an audio CD or a DVD. fn+f11 Play the next track on an audio CD or a DVD. fn+f12 To use a hotkey command on the computer keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Displaying system information (fn+esc) Press fn+esc to display information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. In the Windows fn+esc display, the version of the system BIOS (basic input-output system) is displayed as the BIOS date. On some computer models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. The BIOS date is sometimes called the system ROM version number. Opening the Help and Support Center (fn+f1) Press fn+f1 to open the Help and Support Center. In addition to providing information about your Windows operating system, the Help and Support Center provides Information about your computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications. Answers to questions about using your computer. Tutorials to help you learn to use the computer and Windows features. Updates for the Windows operating system, drivers, and the software provided on your computer. Checkups for computer functionality. Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures. Links to HP support specialists. Opening the Print Options window (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to open the Print Options window of the active Windows application. 8 Chapter 2 Using the keyboard ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Opening a Web browser (fn+f3) Press fn+f3 to open your Web browser. Until you have set up your Internet or network services, the fn+f3 hotkey opens the Windows Internet Connection Wizard. After you have set up your Internet or network services and your Web browser home page, you can press fn+f3 to quickly access your home page and the Internet. Switching the screen image (fn+f4) Press fn+f4 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing fn+f4 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f4 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the computer. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f4 hotkey:

LCD (computer display) External VGA (most external monitors) S-Video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture cards with S-Video-in jacks) Composite video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture cards with composite-video-

in jacks) NOTE Composite video devices can be connected to the system only by using an optional expansion product. ENWW Using hotkeys 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Initiating standby (fn+f5) Press fn+f5 to initiate standby. When standby is initiated, your information is stored in random access memory (RAM), the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the computer is in standby, the power light blinks. CAUTION To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating standby. The computer must be turned on before you can initiate standby. If the computer is in hibernation, you must restore from hibernation before you can initiate standby. NOTE To restore from hibernation, briefly press the power button. To resume from standby, briefly press the power button, press any key on the keyboard, or press a Quick Launch button. The function of the fn+f5 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f5 hotkey to initiate hibernation instead of standby. NOTE In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f5 hotkey. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to the Help and Support Center. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the computer. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the computer. Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) Press fn+f7 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. 10 Chapter 2 Using the keyboard ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Playing, pausing or resuming an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f9) The fn+f9 hotkey functions only when an audio CD or a DVD is inserted:

If the audio CD or the DVD is not playing, press fn+f9 to begin or resume the play. If the audio CD or the DVD is playing, press fn+f9 to pause the play. Stopping an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to stop the play of an audio CD or a DVD. Playing previous track or section of an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f11) While an audio CD or a DVD is playing, press fn+f11 to play the previous track of the CD or the previous section of the DVD. Playing next track or section of an audio CD or a DVD (fn+f12) While an audio CD or a DVD is playing, press fn+f12 to play the next track of the CD or the next section of the DVD. ENWW Using hotkeys 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel The HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel manages the following settings:

Programming of the Media button and the DVD button Preferences for the operating system and program font and icon settings Preferences for the display of the HP Quick Launch Buttons icon on the taskbar Button assignments for non-administrator users Button assignments for the Easy Access buttons on an optional external keyboard NOTE Quick Launch buttons are called Easy Access buttons on an optional external keyboard. The following sections provide instructions for setting preferences within the control panel. For additional on-screen information about any item on the control panel, click the Help button in the upper-right corner of the window. The Help button is identified with a question mark icon. Opening the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel You can open the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel in any of the following ways:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Quick Launch Buttons. Double-click the HP Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Right-click the HP Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area, and select Adjust HP Quick Launch Buttons Properties. Setting button preferences You can program the Media button to open the Media Menu, or you can program the Media button to open media programs from a defined list when the button is pressed. You can also program the DVD button to open media programs from a defined list when the button is pressed. To program the Media button to open the Media Menu when the button is pressed, follow these steps:

1. In the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel, click the Media tab. 2. Click the button next to Open the Media Menu and let you select an application from the list. 3. To save your preferences and close the control panel, click OK. To program the Media button or the DVD button to open a media program from a defined list, follow these steps:

1. In the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel, click the Media tab. 2. Click the down arrow next to the button you want to set, and click a program from the list. 12 Chapter 2 Using the keyboard ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3. To add a program, click the Add button. a. In the Add media applications dialog box, enter the program file name or click Browse to search for available programs. b. Click OK. 4. To save your preferences and close the control panel, click OK. Setting Zoom preferences To change operating system and application font and icon settings:

1. In the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel, click the Zoom tab. 2. Use the sliders to adjust the font and icon size in the operating system, and to adjust title and menu font size in programs. 3. 4. To synchronize operating system and program settings, click the Synchronize OS and application settings box. To save your preferences and close the control panel, click OK. NOTE To restore the factory settings, click the Default button. Setting other preferences You can set icon and external keyboard assignments in the Quick Launch Button control panel. NOTE Some of the preferences listed on the Preferences tab may not be supported by your computer. To set a preference:

1. 2. In the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel, click the Preferences tab. To display or enable a preference, select the check box next to the item. or To clear or disable a preference, clear the check box next to the item. 3. To save your preferences and close the control panel, click OK. NOTE For on-screen information about any item on the Preferences tab, click the Help button in the upper-right corner of the window, and then click the item. The Help button is identified with a question mark icon. ENWW Using the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Using the keypads The computer has an embedded numeric keypad and also supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Component fn key num lock light num lk key Description Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. On: Num lock is on. Press with the fn key to enable the embedded numeric keypad. Embedded numeric keypad Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) 14 Chapter 3 Using the keypads ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the embedded numeric keypad The 15 keys of the embedded numeric keypad can be used like the keys on an external keypad. When the embedded numeric keypad is turned on, each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key. Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad Press fn+num lk to enable the embedded numeric keypad. The num lock light is turned on. Press fn

+num lk again to return the keys to their standard keyboard functions. NOTE The embedded numeric keypad will not function while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the computer or to an optional A USB mouse can also be connected to the system using the ports on an optional docking device or expansion product. Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad You can temporarily alternate the functions of keys on the embedded numeric keypad between their standard keyboard functions and their keypad functions by using the fn key or the fn+shift key combination. To change the function of a keypad key to keypad functions while the keypad is off, press and hold the fn key while pressing the keypad key. To use the keypad keys temporarily as standard keys while the keypad is on:

Press and hold the fn key to type in lowercase. Press and hold fn+shift to type in uppercase. Using an external numeric keypad Most keys on most external numeric keypads function differently according to whether num lock is on or off. (Num lock is turned off at the factory.) For example:

When num lock is on, most keypad keys type numbers. When num lock is off, most keypad keys function like the arrow, page up, or page down keys. When num lock on an external keypad is turned on, the num lock light on the computer is turned on. When num lock on an external keypad is turned off, the num lock light on the computer is turned off. If an external keypad is connected, the embedded numeric keypad cannot be turned on. To turn num lock on or off on an external keypad as you work:

Press the num lk key on the external keypad, not on the computer. ENWW Using the embedded numeric keypad 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, and touchscreen (select models only) Clean the touchscreen (select models only) regularly with non-abrasive wipes intended for this purpose. Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner could deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. 16 Chapter 4 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, and touchscreen (select models only) ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index B buttons TouchPad 1 TouchPad on/off 1 C composite video 9 D display image, switching 9 screen brightness hotkeys 10 E external keyboard assignments 13 F fn key 7 function keys 7 H Help and Support Center hotkey 8 hotkeys audio CD or DVD controls 11 decreasing screen brightness 10 description 7 displaying system information 8 increasing screen brightness 10 initiating QuickLock 10 initiating standby 10 opening Help and Support Center 8 opening Print Options window 8 opening Web browser 9 switching screen image 9 using 8 Q QuickLock hotkey 10 S S-Video 9 screen brightness hotkeys 10 screen image, switching 9 scrolling regions, TouchPad 1 standby hotkey 10 system information hotkey 8 T TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 scrolling regions 1 using 1 TouchPad light, identifying 1 TouchPad on/off button 1 V video transmission types 9 W Web browser hotkey 9 Z zoom preferences 13 I icon assignments 13 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 7 keypad, embedded enabling and disabling 15 identifying 14 switching key functions 15 using 15 keypad, external num lock 15 using 15 L lights TouchPad 1 M media controls, hotkeys 11 mouse, external connecting 2 setting preferences 2 N num lock, external keypad 15 P pointing devices identifying 2 setting preferences 2 using 2 pointing stick identifying 2 using 2 Print Options window hotkey 8 ENWW Index 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power Management User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431180-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Setting power options Using power-saving states ................................................................................................................... 1 Initiating or exiting Sleep ...................................................................................................... 1 Initiating or exiting Hibernation ............................................................................................ 2 Using power plans ................................................................................................................................ 3 Viewing the current power plan ........................................................................................... 3 Selecting a different power plan .......................................................................................... 3 Customizing power plans ..................................................................................................... 3 Setting a password prompt on wakeup ................................................................................................ 4 2 Using battery power Using the battery meter ........................................................................................................................ 6 Displaying the remaining battery charge ............................................................................. 6 Hiding or displaying the battery meter icon .......................................................................... 6 Inserting or removing the battery .......................................................................................................... 7 Charging a battery ................................................................................................................................ 8 Managing low-battery conditions .......................................................................................................... 9 Identifying low-battery conditions ......................................................................................... 9 Resolving a low-battery condition ...................................................................................... 10 Resolving a low-battery condition when external power is available ................ 10 Resolving a low-battery condition when a charged battery is available ............ 10 Resolving a low-battery condition when no power source is available ............. 10 Resolving a low-battery condition when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ........................................................................................................ 10 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................................... 11 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................................ 11 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep .............................................................................. 11 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................................ 12 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ...................................................................................... 13 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................................... 13 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................................. 14 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................................. 15 Disposing of a used battery ................................................................................................................ 16 3 Using external AC power Connecting the AC adapter ................................................................................................................ 18 4 Shutting down the computer ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Setting power options Using power-saving states CAUTION To prevent possible audio and video degradation, or loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE You cannot initiate any type of networking communications or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When you initiate Sleep, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or the battery reaches a critical low-battery state while in the Sleep state, your work is saved to the hard drive. When you initiate Hibernation, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. Initiating or exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 10 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 25 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. NOTE Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f5. Close the display. Click Start, click the icon next to the Lock button, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep, press the power button. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE If you have set a password to be required upon wakeup, you must enter your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. ENWW Using power-saving states 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Initiating or exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after minutes of inactivity or if the battery reaches a critical low-battery state. NOTE Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

Press the power button. or a. Click Start, and then click the arrow next to the Lock button. b. Click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation, press the power button. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE If you have set a password to be required upon wakeup, you must enter your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. 2 Chapter 1 Setting power options ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power and maximize performance. Windows Vista provides 3 power plans:

BalancedBalances energy consumption and system performance. Power saverConserves power by reducing system performance. High performanceProvides the highest level of system performance. You can change the settings of these power plans or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Click Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Under the computer's selected power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Change the Turn off display and Put computer to sleep timeout settings, as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. ENWW Using power plans 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting a password prompt on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Click Require a password. 3. Click Save changes. 4 Chapter 1 Setting power options ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To avoid potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP. ENWW 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the battery meter The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon, located in the notification area at the far right of the taskbar. To access Power Options or the Mobility Center, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon. The battery meter icon changes shape to indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a critically low level. Displaying the remaining battery charge

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. You can view the estimated number of minutes of charge remaining in the Mobility Center. To open Mobility Center. The time indicates the approximate running time remaining if the computer continues to consume power at the current level. For example, the time remaining decreases when playing a DVD and increases when a DVD stops playing. Hiding or displaying the battery meter icon 1. Right-click the taskbar, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Notification Area tab. 3. Under System icon, clear the Power check box to hide the battery meter icon, or select the Power check box to display the battery meter icon. 4. Click OK. 6 Chapter 2 Using battery power ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION To prevent loss of information when removing a battery that is the sole power source, initiate Hibernation or turn off the computer before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Insert the battery into the battery bay (1) and rotate it downward until it is seated (2). The battery release latches (3) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:

1. 2. 3. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery. Pivot the battery(2) away from the computer and remove it from the computer (3). ENWW Inserting or removing the battery 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional expansion product, or an optional power adapter. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster while the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery has reached a low-battery condition and is not charging. Off: The battery is fully charged or not installed. 8 Chapter 2 Using battery power ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Managing low-battery conditions The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery condition alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low-battery conditions When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low-battery condition, the battery light blinks. If a low-battery condition is not resolved, the computer enters a critical low-battery condition, and the battery light continues to blink. In a critical low-battery condition:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. ENWW Managing low-battery conditions 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Resolving a low-battery condition CAUTION To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical low-

battery condition and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low-battery condition when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product Optional power adapter Resolving a low-battery condition when a charged battery is available 1. Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low-battery condition when no power source is available

Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low-battery condition when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 10 Chapter 2 Using battery power ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Calibrating a battery NOTE It is not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time When the battery has been unused for one month or more Three steps are involved in calibrating a battery: fully charging, discharging, and then fully recharging. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE A battery can charge whether the computer is off or in use, but it will charge faster when the computer is off. To fully charge the battery:

1. Insert the battery into the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the computer turns on. 3. Leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the computer is turns off. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Click Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change this plan. 3. Record the Turn off display and Put computer to sleep settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off display and Put computer to sleep settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. ENWW Calibrating a battery 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9. Click OK. 10. Click Save settings. Step 3: Discharge the battery The computer must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the computer but will discharge faster while the computer is in use. If you plan to leave the computer unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the computer occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the computer is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the computer from its external power source, but do not turn off the computer. 2. Run the computer on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low-battery condition. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the computer shuts down. 12 Chapter 2 Using battery power ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. 2. Plug the computer into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the computer turns off. You can use the computer while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the computer is off. If the computer is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and potential information loss. 1. Right-click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Adjust Power Properties. or Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 3. Click Change advanced power settings. 4. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 5. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 6. Click OK. 7. Click Save settings. ENWW Calibrating a battery 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Conserving battery power Use the operating system to select a power plan with low power-use settings. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, if you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f8 and fn+f7 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. Use optional powered speakers instead of the internal speakers, or adjust speaker volume as you needed. If an external display device is connected to the computer, press fn+f4 to switch the screen image from the computer display to the external display. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. 14 Chapter 2 Using battery power ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Storing a battery CAUTION To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. ENWW Storing a battery 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). Replace the battery only with a battery approved for this computer. Refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices for battery disposal information. 16 Chapter 2 Using battery power ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

AC adapter included with the computer Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

When you are charging or calibrating a battery pack. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are installing or modifying system software. When you are writing information to a CD or DVD. When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. ENWW 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). 18 Chapter 3 Using external AC power ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 Shutting down the computer CAUTION Shutting down the computer results in the loss of unsaved information. The Shut Down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer. When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port or a 1394 port. When you have installed a program or update that requires Windows to restart to complete the installation. When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. To shut down the computer:

NOTE If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation before shutdown is possible. 1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Click Start, and then click the arrow next to the Lock button. 3. Click Shut Down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use normal Windows shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, click the arrow next to the power button icon and click Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. ENWW 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Quick Reference HP Entertainment PC For more information about your computer, select Start >

Help and Support > User Guides. Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Quick Reference HP Notebook PC First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431182-001 Contents 1 Finding Information Finding the Help and Support Center (Start > Help and Support) . 11 Finding the user guides (Start > Help and Support > User Guides) . 11 Identifying installed software and hardware . 12 2 Next steps Creating recovery discs . 21 Protecting the computer . 21 Protecting the computer from viruses . 21 Protecting your system files . 22 Protecting your privacy . 22 Protecting the computer from power surges . 23 Using the computer safely . 23 Connecting to the Internet . 24 Choosing the type of Internet access available . 25 Choosing an ISP . 25 Installing additional software and hardware . 27 Updating the software installed on the computer. 28 Turning off the computer correctly . 28 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 31 Quick troubleshooting . 31 The computer is unable to start up. 31 Quick Reference v Contents The computer screen is blank . 32 Software is functioning abnormally . 33 The computer is turned on but not responding . 34 The computer is unusually warm. 34 An external device is not working. 35 The home wireless network connection is not working . 35 Contacting Customer Care . 36 4 Software backup and recovery Backing up your information . 42 When to back up . 42 Back up suggestions . 42 Using system restore points . 43 When to create restore points . 43 Create a system restore point. 43 Restore to a previous date and time. 44 Creating recovery discs . 44 Reinstalling software programs and drivers. 45 Reinstalling preinstalled programs or drivers . 46 Reinstalling programs from discs . 46 Performing a recovery . 47 Recovering from the recovery discs . 47 Recovering from the partition on the hard drive . 47 Deleting the recovery partition on the hard drive . 48 Updating reinstalled software . 49 A Using the optical drive Inserting an optical disc . A1 Removing an optical disc (with power) . A2 Removing an optical disc (without power) . A2 B Specifications Operating environment. B1 vi Quick Reference Contents Rated input power . B2 Expansion port 3 input/output signals (select models only) . B3 C Routine Care Cleaning the display. C1 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard . C1 Traveling and shipping. C2 Index Quick Reference vii Contents viii Quick Reference 1 Finding Information Finding the Help and Support Center

(Start > Help and Support) You can access the Help and Support Center by selecting Start >

Help and Support. In addition to providing information about the operating system, the Help and Support Center covers these topics:

Your computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications. How to help safeguard your computer. How to get the best performance from the battery. How to set up a wireless network. Links to community forums of IT experts. Finding the user guides (Start > Help and Support > User Guides) User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through the Help and Support Center. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Quick Reference 11 Finding Information Identifying installed software and hardware The computer includes software that is preinstalled on the hard drive. To see a list of the software:

1. Select Start > All Programs. 2. Double-click the program you want to open. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. To see a list of hardware installed on the computer:

1. Select Start > Computer. 2. Click the Properties tab and, in the left pane, click Device Manager. 3. In the User Account Control dialog box, click Continue. You can modify your device configurations using Device Manager. 12 Quick Reference 2 Next steps Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, it is recommended that you create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. For information on how to create a set of recovery discs, refer to Chapter 4, Creating recovery discs. Protecting the computer The information in this section is designed to protect your computer from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Quick Reference 21 Next steps Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Protecting your system files The operating system and PC Recovery software provide several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. For additional information, refer to Chapter 4, Software backup and recovery. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or your computer. To optimize the privacy protection features:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software applications contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. A firewall is software that monitors incoming traffic on the computer. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. 22 Quick Reference Next steps Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from computer or electronics retailers in some regions. Using the computer safely WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safely feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in the Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or refer to a User Guides disc included with some models. Quick Reference 23 Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Connecting to the Internet Your computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. The following sections of this guide give more information about these tasks:

Choosing the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband, wireless, or dial-up, and connect the hardware. Choosing an Internet service provider (ISP). Internet hardware and software features vary depending on computer model and your location. 24 Quick Reference Next steps Choosing the type of Internet access available There are 3 basic types of Internet access:

BroadbandHigh-speed Internet service providers include the following types of connections:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services For broadband access, additional hardware and/or software must be provided by your ISP. WirelessFor high-speed mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. To learn about setting up wireless access, visit the HP Network Assistant at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). To access Wireless Home Network Setup and for instructions on using this software, select Start > Help and Support. Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing into a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes software features to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account:

Easy Internet Sign-up (available in some locations) Quick Reference 25 Next steps ISP-provided icons (available in some locations) Microsoft Windows New Connection Wizard (available in all locations) Using Easy Internet Sign-up If the Easy Internet Sign-up utility is supported in the country in which you purchased the computer, you can access the utility by using either of the following methods:

Double-click the Easy Internet Sign-up icon on the Windows desktop. or Select Start > All Programs > Online Services > Easy Internet Sign-up. The Easy Internet Sign-up provides these tasks:

Signing up for a new Internet account Configuring the computer to use an existing account Using ISP-provided icons If ISP-provided icons are supported in the country in which you purchased the computer, the icons may be displayed either individually on the Windows desktop or grouped in a desktop folder named Online Services. To set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account:

Double-click an icon, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Using the Windows New Connection Wizard You can use the Windows New Connection Wizard to connect to the Internet in any of these situations:

If you already have an account with an ISP. 26 Quick Reference Next steps If you have a disc from an ISP. If you do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. (The list of ISP providers is not available in all regions.) If you have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the Windows New Connection Wizard and instructions for using the wizard, follow this step:

Select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Installing additional software and hardware To install any additional software from a CD or DVD, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into the optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. For details about using the software, refer to the manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Quick Reference 27 Next steps Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, follow this stepr:

Select Start > Help and Support. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system:

a. Click Start. b. Click the arrow next to the Lock button, and then click Shut Down. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. 28 Quick Reference Next steps Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. Quick Reference 29 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, follow the troubleshooting steps below:

1. Refer to Quick troubleshooting, next in this chapter. 2. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through the Help and Support Center. Select Start >

Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. 3. Contact Customer Care for further assistance. Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power lights are turned on. If the computer and the power lights are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. Quick Reference 31 Troubleshooting The suggestions below may help you determine the reason the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try these suggestions:

Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If the computer starts up, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low-battery condition, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter to start the computer and allow the battery to charge. The computer screen is blank If you have not turned off the computer but the screen is blank, one or more of the following may be the cause:

The computer may be in the Sleep state or Hibernation. The computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. The display switch may not be functioning properly. 32 Quick Reference Troubleshooting The suggestions below may help you determine the reason the computer screen is blank. To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is in Windows but is not in use, or when the computer has reached a low-battery condition. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Software is functioning abnormally If the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally, follow these suggestions:

Restart the computer:

a. Click Start. b. Click the arrow next to the Lock button, and then click Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 2. Quick Reference 33 Troubleshooting The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on but not responding to software or keyboard commands, try turning off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system:

a. Click Start. b. Click the arrow next to the Lock button, and then click Shut Down. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. If you are unable to shut down the computer with this procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the lost of unsaved information. 1. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. or Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. 2. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do no allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. 34 Quick Reference Troubleshooting If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. An external device is not working If an external device does not function as expected, follow these suggestions:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Check the following conditions:

All device connections are secure. The device is receiving electrical power. The device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with the operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. The correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a CD included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The home wireless network connection is not working If a home wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless device is turned on and the wireless light on the computer is blue. If the light is amber, press the wireless button to turn on the wireless device. Quick Reference 35 Troubleshooting Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router (access point) is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable modem, and that the lights are on. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). Contacting Customer Care If you are unable to find the help you need by using the Help and Support Center, you may need to contact Customer Care. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of a printer or other accessories connected to the computer. 36 Quick Reference Troubleshooting Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support to get help by e-mail or to access Customer Care telephone numbers. Quick Reference 37 Troubleshooting 38 Quick Reference 4 Software backup and recovery Tools provided by the operating system and PC Recovery software are designed to help you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Back up your information regularly to protect your important system files. Make a set of recovery discs (PC Recovery software feature). Recovery discs are used to start up (boot) your computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Create system restore points (operating system feature). System restore points allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state. Recover a program or driver (PC Recovery software feature). This feature helps you reinstall a program or driver without performing a full system recovery. Perform a full system recovery (PC Recovery software feature). With PC Recovery, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. PC Recovery works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Quick Reference 41 Software backup and recovery Backing up your information When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis. Set reminders to back up your information regularly. Before the computer is repaired or restored. Before you add or modify hardware or software. Back up suggestions Create system restore points using the Windows XP Professional System Restore feature. Store personal files in the My Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

a. Display the screen. 42 Quick Reference Software backup and recovery b. Copy the screen:

To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. c. To paste the copied images into a document, open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. Using system restore points When you back up your system, you are creating a system restore point. A system restore point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system Recovering to an earlier restore point does not affect data files saved or e-mails created since the last restore point. When to create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. If you revert to a restore point and then change your mind, you can reverse the restoration. Create a system restore point 1. Select Start > Help and Support, and then click System Restore. The System Restore window opens. 2. Click Create a restore point, and then click Next. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Quick Reference 43 Software backup and recovery Restore to a previous date and time To revert to a restore point (created at a previous date and time), when the computer was functioning optimally:

1. Select Start > Help and Support, and then click System Restore. The System Restore window opens. 2. Click Restore my computer to an earlier time, and then click Next. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery discs PC Recovery Disc Creator creates a set of recovery CDs or DVDs for the computer. Use recovery discs to restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings, in case of system failure or instability. Handle these discs carefully and keep them in a safe place. The software allows the creation of only one set of recovery discs. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media

(purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with the PC Recovery Disc Creator software. The computer must be connected to AC power during this process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the computer optical drive. 44 Quick Reference Software backup and recovery If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open PC Recovery Disc Creator, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > System Recovery > PC Recovery Disc Creator. The PC Recovery Disc Creator tool opens. 2. Click Next. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you will be prompted to connect to AC power before you can go to the next step. 3. Select the type of disc you want to use, and then click Next. The software examines the image and displays the number of blank discs needed to create your recovery discs. 4. Insert the first disc and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the creation of the recovery discs. Reinstalling software programs and drivers If a program or driver preinstalled at the factory is accidentally erased or is damaged, the Application and Driver Recovery tool allows you to reinstall it. Software not provided with this computer must be reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer or downloaded from the manufacturers Web site. Before reinstalling the program, be sure it is fully uninstalled. The Application and Driver Recovery tool replaces corrupted system files and reinstalls deleted system files within the program. Quick Reference 45 Software backup and recovery In most cases, if the program you are reinstalling is still on your computer, the reinstallation process does not affect your personal settings. In all cases, if a program has been deleted from your computer, the reinstallation process reinstalls the program or utility to the factory image but cannot restore your personal settings. Reinstalling preinstalled programs or drivers 1. Remove the program or driver:

In some cases, drivers are not listed in the Add or Remove Programs list. If the driver is not listed, it does not need to be removed. a. Select Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. b. Click the program or driver you want to remove, and then click Change/Remove. 2. Select Start > All Programs > System Recovery >

Application and Driver Recovery. The Application and Driver Recovery tool opens. 3. Select Application Installation or Driver Installation, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the program or driver recovery. 5. Restart the computer if prompted. Reinstalling programs from discs 1. Insert the disc into the optical drive. 46 Quick Reference Software backup and recovery 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the installation instructions on the screen. 3. Restart the computer if prompted. Performing a recovery PC Recovery software allows you to repair or restore the system if you experience system failure or instability. PC Recovery works from recovery discs that you create or from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive. Windows XP has its own built-in repair features, such as System Restore and driver roll-back capabilities. If you have not already tried these features, try them before using PC Recovery. PC Recovery only recovers software that was preinstalled at the factory. Software not provided with this computer must be reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer or downloaded from the manufacturers Web site. Recovering from the recovery discs To restore the system from the recovery discs:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering from the partition on the hard drive You can perform a recovery from the partition on the hard drive from either the Start button or f11. To restore the system from the partition:

Quick Reference 47 Software backup and recovery 1. Access the PC Recovery tool:

To access PC Recovery from the Start button, select Start > All Programs > System Recovery > PC Recovery. To access PC Recovery from f11, restart the computer and press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. The PC Recovery tool opens. 2. Select PC Recovery, and then click Next. The computer restarts and the PC Recovery tool opens. 3. Click OK. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the system recovery. If you want to perform a destructive recovery:

A destructive recovery formats the hard drive and restores the computer to its factory state. Select this option only as a last restort. a. Click Advanced Options in the System Recovery screen. b. Select Destructive Recovery and follow the on-screen instructions. Deleting the recovery partition on the hard drive The PC Recovery Advanced Options menu provides the option of deleting the recovery partition, which will increase space on the hard drive. Delete the recovery partition only if you have already created recovery discs. CAUTION: After you create the recovery discs, you can increase space on the hard drive by deleting the recovery partition. However, doing this is not recommended. If you delete this partition, you will lose any information that is on the partition, including the PC Recovery software. Thereafter, you must use the recovery discs to access PC Recovery software. 48 Quick Reference Software backup and recovery To delete the recovery partition:

1. If you have not already created recovery discs, create them now. 2. Select Start > All Programs > System Recovery > PC Recovery. The PC Recovery tool opens. 3. Select PC Recovery, and then click Next. The computer restarts and the PC Recovery tool opens. 4. Click OK. 5. At the System Recovery screen, click Advanced Options. 6. Select Delete Recovery Partition (not recommended) and follow the on-screen instructions. Updating reinstalled software After you perform a system recovery, connect to the Internet to update all reinstalled software. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on your computer:

Select Start > Help and Support. To update optional software, follow the instructions provided by the software manufacturer. Some programs include an update feature you can access from a Help button or menu within the program. Quick Reference 49 Software backup and recovery 410 Quick Reference A Using the optical drive Inserting an optical disc To insert an optical disc:

1. Turn on the computer. 2. Press the optical drive release button on the drive bezel to release the media tray, and then pull out the tray. 3. Hold the CD or DVD by the edges to avoid touching the flat surfaces, and position the disc over the tray spindle, which is located in the center of the tray, with the label side up. If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. 4. Gently press the disc down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 5. Close the media tray. After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If you have not selected a default media player, an AutoPlay dialog box opens. It prompts you to select how you want to use the media content. Quick Reference A1 Using the optical drive Removing an optical disc (with power) To remove an optical disc if the computer is running on external or battery power, follow these steps:

1. Turn on the computer. 2. Press the optical drive release button on the drive bezel to release the media tray, and then pull out the tray. 3. Remove the disc from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the media tray and place the disc in a protective case. Removing an optical disc

(without power) To remove an optical disc if external or battery power is unavailable, follow these steps:

1. Insert the end of a paper clip into the optical drive release access in the front bezel of the optical drive. 2. Press in gently until the media tray is released, and then pull out the tray. 3. Remove the disc from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the media tray and place the disc in a protective case. A2 Quick Reference B Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C 41F to 95F

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Quick Reference B1 Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with your computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with the computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications:

Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc - 19.0 V dc 3.5 A or 4.74 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. B2 Quick Reference Specifications Expansion port 3 input/output signals

(select models only) The signal information in this section may be helpful if you plan to use an optional docking device or expansion product that connects to the expansion port 3 on the computer. (The computer has only one expansion port. The term expansion port 3 describes the type of expansion port.) The following table identifies the input and output signals supported by the expansion port 3 on the computer. Feature USB 2.0 10/100/1000 Ethernet IEEE 1394 (4-pin port) Consumer infrared lens (for optional remote control only) Support Yes Yes No Yes Power inputs Composite TV S-Video TV Component TV S/PDIF audio (select models only) DVI Headphone/speaker audio-out Microphone audio-in VGA Power button Volume control (up/down) Mute/unmute status 65-W to 90-W maximum Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Quick Reference B3 C Routine Care Cleaning the display To remove smudges and lint, frequently clean the display with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. If the screen requires additional cleaning, use premoistened antistatic wipes or an antistatic screen cleaner. CAUTION: To prevent permanent damage to the computer, never spray water, cleaning fluids, or chemicals on the display. Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner could deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Quick Reference C1 Routine Care Traveling and shipping The computer is built to go with you for work and play. For best results, follow the traveling and shipping tips described here. To prepare the computer for traveling and shipping, follow these steps:

a. Back up your information. b. Remove all optical discs and all external media cards, such as digital cards and ExpressCards. To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove the medium from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay, and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. c. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. d. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage, and do not check it in with the rest of your bags. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, place it in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. C2 Quick Reference Routine Care If the computer has a wireless device or a cell phone device installed, such as an 802.11b/g, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), or a General Packet Radio Service

(GPRS) device, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country on your itinerary. Consult with Customer Care about power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Quick Reference C3 Routine Care C4 Quick Reference Index Help and Support Center 11, 31 user guides 11 D Device Manager 12 devices, external drivers 35 troubleshooting 35 display cleaning C1 switching image 33 documentation 11 drivers obtaining 35 reinstalling 45 drives, optical A1 DVD inserting A1 removing, with power A2 removing, without power A2 E electrical storm, precautions and procedures 23 external devices drivers 35 troubleshooting 35 A AC adapter, troubleshooting 32 antivirus software 21, 33 B backing up computer 42 C cables and cords modem 23 power 23, 31 CD inserting A1 removing, with power A2 removing, without power A2 cleaning the display C1 cleaning the keyboard C1 cleaning the TouchPad C1 computer backing up 42 turning off correctly 28 using safely 23 computer viruses 21, 33 cord, power 23, 32 customer support Customer Care 36 Quick Reference Index1 Index F finding Help and Support Center 11 user guides 11 firewalls 22 H hardware identifying 12 installing 27 Help and Support Center (Start

> Help and Support) 11, 31 Hibernation 33 I IEC 60950 compliance 24 image, switching, among display devices 33 Internet choosing an ISP 25 choosing type of access 25 connecting to 24 K keyboard, cleaning C1 L labels, service tag 36 M model number, computer 11 modem connecting 24 surge protection 23 virus protection 21 modem cable 23 monitor, external 33, 35 N Norton Internet Security 21, 33 O operating environment specifications B1 operating system, displaying version number 37 optical disc, inserting A1 optical drive A1 overheating, computer 24, 34 P power surge protection 23 turning off computer 34 turning on computer 31 power cord 2-pin adapter 23 surge protection 23 power lights, on, off 31 printer 35 privacy, protecting 22 Product Id 37 product number, computer 36 protecting privacy 22 protecting system files 22 R rated input power specifications B2 recovery discs, creating 21, 44 Index2 Quick Reference Index safety considerations 24 troubleshooting 34 TouchPad, cleaning C1 traveling with the computer C2 troubleshooting procedures display problems 33 external device problems 35 Hibernation or Sleep problems 33 overheating problems 34 software problems 33 virus problems 33 troubleshooting resources user guides 11 See also troubleshooting procedures turning off computer 34 turning on computer 31 U user guides (Start > Help and Support > User Guides) 11 V vents 34 viruses, computer 21, 33 W Windows Device Manager 12 recovery partition, deleting 48 recovery, system 47 registration number, operating system 37 regulatory information 23 restore points 43 S Safety and Comfort Guide 23 serial number, computer 11, 36 service tag 36 shipping the computer C2 shutting down computer 34 Sleep 33 software identifying 12 installing 27 Norton Internet Security 22 updating 28, 49 specifications operating environment B1 rated input power B2 specifications, computer 11 surge protection 23 switching image among display devices 33 system files, protecting 22 system recovery 47 system restore points 43 T technical support, user guides 11 temperature Quick Reference Index3 Index Index4 Quick Reference 431182-001 Quick setup 1 Unpack the box 2 Insert the battery 3 Connect to external power 2 1 1 3 2 4 Turn on the computer 5 Follow the on-screen instructions 7 Rotate the display The instructions will guide you through setting up and registering your computer. Be sure to pick your language carefully. 1 6 Next steps 2 You are ready to use the computer to Watch movies. Play games. Connect to the Internet. Install additional software and hardware. Create recovery discs. Protect the computer from viruses. For more information on these topics, refer to the Quick Reference guide. Replace this box with PI statement as per spec. Replace this box with PI statement as per spec. Replace this box with PI statement as per spec.

!

WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. 433757-001 For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Left Power connector ExpressCard slot Digital Media Slot Digital Media Slot light Optical drive Optical drive release button Camera*

Rotate button Mobility Center button DVD button Media button Pointing stick Touchpad Front Quick tour Top Internal microphones

* Select models only Setup Instructions Thank you for purchasing an HP computer!

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Vent Stop button Next/fast forward button Play/pause button Previous/rewind button Right S-Video-out jack External monitor port Expansion port 3 RJ-45 (network) jack Pen tether USB port Pen holder S/PDIF headphone jack Audio-out (headphone) jack Display release latch Audio-in (microphone) jack Consumer infrared lens Wireless light Power button Go to Help and Support today!

Select Start > Help and Support to become familiar with all of the tools available to help keep your computer running smoothly, from enhanced driver updates to online diagnostics. Help and Support is your personal technician!

Help and Support also provides the following resources:

Product information and user guides Learn more about using your computer. Select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. Security support for your computer Learn how to protect your computer from threats and viruses. HP Network Assistant Learn about setting up wireless access. Visit the HP Network Assistant at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). Diagnostic tools Learn how to scan your computer and troubleshoot problems. Setup Utility User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431886-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Setup Utility access 2 Using the Setup Utility Changing the language of the Setup Utility .......................................................................................... 2 Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility ........................................................................................ 2 Displaying system information .............................................................................................................. 3 Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility ....................................................................................... 3 Using advanced Setup Utility features ................................................................................................. 4 Closing the Setup Utility ....................................................................................................................... 4 3 Setup Utility menus Main menu ............................................................................................................................................ 5 Security menu ...................................................................................................................................... 5 System Configuration menu ................................................................................................................. 6 Diagnostics menu ................................................................................................................................. 6 Index ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Setup Utility access The Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Microsoft Windows operating system is not working or will not load. The utility reports information about the computer and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. 1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer in Windows. Before Windows opens and while the Press <F10> to enter setup prompt is displayed in the lower-

left corner of the screen, press f10. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Using the Setup Utility Changing the language of the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of the Setup Utility. If the computer is not in the Setup Utility, begin at step 1. If the computer is in the Setup Utility, begin at step 2. 1. To open the Setup Utility, turn on or restart the computer in Windows, and then press f10 while the prompt, Press <F10> to enter setup, is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Press f5 or f6 (or use the arrow keys) to select a language, and then press enter to select a language. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your preference selected is displayed, press enter to save your preference. 5. To set your preferences and exit the Setup Utility, press f10 and then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts in Windows. Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup Utility is not Windows-based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a drop-down list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup Utility is open, press f1. 2 Chapter 2 Using the Setup Utility ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. 2. 3. To open the Setup Utility, turn on or restart the computer in Windows, and then press f10 while the prompt, Press <F10> to enter setup, is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Access the system information by using the Main menu. To close the Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. (The computer restarts in Windows.) Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup Utility default settings. If the computer is not in the Setup Utility, begin at step 1. If the computer is in the Setup Utility, begin at step 2. 1. 2. To open the Setup Utility, turn on or restart the computer in Windows, and then press f10 while the prompt, Press <F10> to enter setup, is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press f10. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter to save your preferences. 4. To set your preferences and exit the Setup Utility, press f10, and then follow the instructions on the screen. The Setup Utility default settings are set when you exit the Setup Utility and go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. ENWW Displaying system information 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using advanced Setup Utility features This guide describes the Setup Utility features recommended for all users. For more information about the Setup Utility features recommended for advanced users only, refer to the Help and Support Center, which is accessible only when the computer is in Windows. The Setup Utility features available for advanced users include a hard drive self-test, a Network Service Boot, and settings for boot order preferences. The <F12> to boot from LAN message that is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen each time the computer is started or restarted in Windows is the prompt for a Network Service Boot. The Press <ESC> to change boot order message that is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen each time the computer is started or restarted in Windows is the prompt to change the boot order. Closing the Setup Utility You can close the Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To close the Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session, use either of the following procedures:

Press f10, and then follow the instructions on the screen. or If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. When you use the f10 procedure, you are offered an option to return to the Setup Utility. When you use the Exit Saving Changes procedure, the Setup Utility closes when you press enter. To close the Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After the Setup Utility closes, the computer restarts in Windows. 4 Chapter 2 Using the Setup Utility ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password To Do This View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the computer. View specification information about the processor, memory size, system BIOS, and keyboard controller version (select models only). To Do This Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. ENWW Main menu 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

System Configuration menu Select Language Support To Do This Change the Setup Utility language. Embedded WLAN Device Radio Enable/disable an embedded wireless LAN device. Embedded Bluetooth Device (select models only) Enable/disable an embedded Bluetooth device (select models only). Enhanced SATA support (select models only) Enable/disable enhanced SATA mode. Boot Options Set the following boot options:

f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of the Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0. 5, 10, 15, 20). CD-ROM bootEnable/disable boot from CD-ROM. Floppy bootEnable/disable boot from Floppy. Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:

USB Floppy ATAPI CD/DVD ROM Drive Hard drive USB Diskette on Key USB Hard drive Network adapter Diagnostics menu Select Hard Disk Self Test To Do This Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Secondary Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on a secondary hard drive. NOTE On models with two hard drives, this menu option is called the Primary Hard Disk Self Test. 6 Chapter 3 Setup Utility menus ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A advanced Setup Utility features 4 B boot options 6 boot order 6 C changing the Setup Utility language 2 closing the Setup Utility 4 D Diagnostics menu 6 displaying system information 3 drives, boot order 6 E embedded Bluetooth device 6 embedded WLAN Device Radio 6 enhanced SATA support 6 S secondary hard drive self test 6 Security menu 5 selecting in the Setup Utility 2 Setup Utility accessing 1 changing the language 2 closing 4 Diagnostics menu 6 displaying system information 3 Main menu 5 navigating and selecting 2 restoring default settings 3 Security menu 5 System Configuration menu 6 using 2 using advanced features 4 System Configuration menu 6 system information 5 H hard drive self test 6 L language support 6 M Main menu 5 N navigating in the Setup Utility 2 P passwords 5 R restoring default settings 3 ENWW Index 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/